Reinforced Concrete Design

r
r
r CVE 482 r Reinforced Concrete
q
tr
r
r
t
r
I
t_
t
L
L
lehmm lI. Shahr..b F.E.o FACI
L
Llniversity of Cincinneti
L
t-
>tt
@--'E&--
-r
t-
l
t-
i--r
_t
._J
t_i
rl
T
L]
{-
I
r
t'
l''
t-
f- CVE 482 - Reinforced Concrete
t- Copyright @ 2010
I Bahram M. Shahrooz) P.E.o FACI
Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

University of Cincinnati
t
t
L
L
Cover Photo: Burj Dubai ( "Dubai Tower") is a slryscraper under construction in the Business
Bay district of Dubai, United Arab Emirates. Construction began on September 21, 2004 and is
t- expected to be co.mpleted and readyr occupation in September 2009. See
http:/iu,tt'tv.concreteccnstructian.net/indusn],-news.ctsp?section{:t&.articleID:65I219 for
more inrmation.
l_
I
.r,
r3*.
';)
I
t
I
L-
L.-
I
t_
l-
cvE 482 BMS
f-
Table of Contents
r Chapter 1 Introduction I
Chapter2 Stresses Under Service Level Loads and Deflection

r 15
Chapter 3 Analysis and Design of Rectangular Beams. .....................38
r Chapter 4 Analysis and Design of T Beams.. ......................7 4
Chapter 5 One \il/ay Slabs......... .93

t-
Chapter 6 Shear r04
f- Chapter 7 Doubly-Reinforced Beams............. 151
Chapter 8 Analysis and Design of Columns... 156

t-
Chapter 9 Bond, Anchorage, and Development Length 188
t
t
t
L
t
l_
t-,
r cv,482 BMS
r
t-
t-
t'
t-
t- Chapter 1
t_
Introduction
t"
t
L
t
t,
ti
1
LJ
cv,482 BMS
Introduction
Reinforced concrete structures are hybrid systems in which steel and concrete are used
simultaneously. These two materials have complementary properties that result in an efficient
system. Steel provides the needed tensile strength as concrete is extremely weak in tension,
while concrete has compressive strength and provides the necessary strength in compression.
Therefore, steel, in the form of reinforcing bars, is placed in the tension region of members, as
shown below.
Compression
zone
I
Reinforcing
bars in
Tension tension
zone zone
Note that steel can also provide compressive strength and is placed in the compression region.
For steel and concrete to work together, adequate bond must be present between the two
materials to prevent slippage. The first reinforced concrete beam was built and tested in 1850,
and the first cast-in-placed reinforced concrete structure was built in 1870 in New York.
In contrast to steel, concrete is non-homogenous. The main components of concrete are

cement and aggregates (coarse and fine). Concrete as a material is discussed in detail elsewhere.
For reinforced concrete design, we need to know a number of the basic properties.
Steel Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement may be reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, or wires.

Reinforcing bars have deformations in order to improve their bond to concrete. Deformations
must meet ASTM requirements for maximum spacing and minimum height. Standard U.S. bars
are as summarized in Table 1.
Reinforcing bars are round, but you may see square bars in old structures. For No. 3
through 8 bars, the bar diameter is the bar size divided by 8. For example, the diameter of a No.
6 is 6/8:0.75 in. The area of No. 9, 10, ll,14, and 18 corresponds to the area of old 1", l-1l8",
lt/+", lt/r", and 2" square bars (i.e., I in2, I.27 in2, I.56 inz, 2.25 in2, and 4 in2). The equivalent
diameter of each bar is such that the area of round bars will be the same as that for square bars.
2
cvB 482 BMS
Table 1. Standard U.S. Bar Sizes

Nominal Nominal Dimensions
Bar Size
Weieht (lb/ft) Diameter (in.) Area (in2)
#3 0.376 0.375 0.11
#4 0.668 0.5 0.2
#5 1.043 0.625 0.31
#6 1.502 0.75 0.44
#7 2.044 0.875 0.6
#8 2.67 I 0.79
#9 3.4 r.128 1
#10 4.303 1.27 1.27

#t1 5.313 t.4t 1.56
#r4 7.65 t.693 2.2s
#18 13.6 2.257 4
Steel reinforcement has different Main Ribs

specifications, i.e., billet steel (ASTM 4615) Letter or Symbol
which is for new steel, low-alloy steel (4706) for Producng Mll
which is ideal for welding, rail and axle steel Bar Size # 11
(ASTM A996) which is for steel rolled from old Steel Type'
steel, stainless steel (ASTM A955), and high-
S for Billet (A615)
strength steel ASTAM 41035) currently lfor Rail (4616)
Grade
Mark
allowed only for transverse reinforcement or lR for Rail meetng S1 (4616)
A for Axle (4617)
spiral reinforcement. Reinforcing bars come in W for Low Alloy (4706)
different grades. The Grade of steel refers to its

Line (One line only)
minimum yield strength. For example, Gr. 60 * Bars marked with S and W meet both 4615 and 4706
steel has a minimum yield strength ( ) of
60,000 psi or 60 ksi. Most steel produced in Main Ribs
U.S. is now Grade 60, although Gr. 40 and 50 Letter or Symbol
steel is found in older bridges, buildings, and for Producing Mill
other structures. Reinforcing bars have a Bar Size # I

number of identification marks that denote the Steel Type'
producer's mill, bar size, type of steel, and
S for Bllet (4615)
Grade. An example is shown on the right. Grade
Mark
Stress-strain relationships of different Grade Line
grades of steel are compared qualitatively {Two lines onty)
below. The strain at the onset of strain Examples of Bar ldentification
hardening (e,6 )for Gr. 40 steel is about 0.012 to
0.020 in.lin., and is about 0.004 in.iin. for Gr.
60 steel. It is seen that lower grade steel has more deformation capacity. For example, the
failure strain (e ) for Gr. 40 is about 0.2 in.lin. whereas for Gr. 60 is about 0.12 in.lin. Note that
ACI idealizes the stress-strain relationship as an elastic perfectly plastic model. The compression
strength and stiffness of reinforcing steel is taken to be the same as that determined from tension
test coupons.
J
CVE 482 BMS
120
Gr.75
100
80
I
'6 Gr.60 g, ,
Y
360
E
(t)
Gr.40
40
tsn
20
0
0.00 0.02 0.04 0 06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0 18 0.20
Shain (in.fn.)
Grade 40 and 60 A615 and A706 bars have normally a well-defined yield point and yield
plateau. If the yield point is not identifiable (which usually is the case for higher grades of steel),
the yield point isdetermined by ACI as the stress conesponding to a strain of 0.0035 in./in. for
steel with yield strength of 60,000 psi or higher. One may also use the 0.2%o offset rule to define
the yield stress.
120
100
r
80
lt
ll
- AClMethod
860
(, L_
--**O.2o/o offset rule
I

40
u
20
u
0
0 0.005 0.01 0.015 0.o2 0.025 0.03 0.035 0.04
Strain (in./ln.)
4
cv 482 BMS
Reinforcing bars must retain their full yield strength through one 180-degree cold bend
when the inside diameter of the bend is no less than the bend radius limits specif,red tnTable 7.2,
7 .2.2 of ACI 3 18.
Reinforcing bars may be uncoated or epoxy coated. Epoxy coated bars, which are
intended to provide better corrosion protection, must conform to ASTM A775 or 4934
specifications. Epoxy coated reinforcing bars are often used in order to minimize corrosion of
reinforcement and subsequently spalling of concrete under severe environmental conditions such
as in bridge decks or parking garages subjected to de-icing chemicals.
Individual deformed or plain wires may be used in precast members. Plain wire is
denoted by the letter "'W' followed by a number which indicates the cross-sectional area in
hundredths of a square inch. A similar notation is used for deformed wire except that the letter
"D" is used. 'Wires have higher grades (Grade 75 to 80 is common)
Individual wires are welded together to make welded wire reinforcement (V/V/R) which
are used in thin slabs, thin shells, and other locations where deformed bars cannot be placed with
adequate cover. WV/R consists of wires arranged in a square or rectangular configuration.
WWR must conform with ASTM 4185 if made of plain wire or to ASTM A497 if made of
deformed wire. Minimum yield strength of 65,000 psi is required for plain WWR, and a
minimum of 70,000 psi for deformed WWR. WWR is manufactured in sheets and rolls. High-
strength strands (a group of individual wires 'owoven" together) are used in prestressed members.
Welded wire reinforcement is usually shown on drawings as follows: WWR followed by

the longitudinal spacing of wires, transverse spacing of wires, size of longitudinal wires, and size
'W8
of the transverse wires. For example, WWR 6xI2 - W16 x means: spacing of longitudinal
wires: 6 in.; spacing of transverse wires : 12 in.;plain longitudinal W16 wires (area:0.16 in2);
and plain transverse W8 wires (area: 0.08 in2).
An important property of reinforcing steel is the modulus of elasticity (8.). Although the
modulus of elasticity varies, ACI $8.5.2 specifies as 29,000,000 psi (29,000 ksi). Note that the
actual measured values of the slope of stress-strain curves (which is the modulus of elasticity)
may be as much as 5Yo less to 3Y, more than the specified value.
Concrete
Concrete is a manufactured form of stone. A powder of Portland cement is mixed with

water, sand (fine aggregate), and rock (coarse aggregate) to be placed into forms in order to
5
CYE 482 BMS
define the shape of structural elements such as slabs, beams, columns, and walls. Representative
stress-strain relationships for normal-weight concrete (w" =145 pc are shown below. (For
reinforced concrete members, 150 pcf is used as the unit weight to account for the additional
weight from reinforcement.) Note that lower-strength concrete has greater deformability than
higher-strength concrete.
A representative stress-strain curve for concrete is shown below. The initial stiffness
(slope of the stress-strain graph) tends to decrease at strains above 0.001 when internal
microcracking of cement paste takes place between pieces of large aggregate. The maximum
stress typically occurs at a strain of about 0.002 to 0.003. At the strain where maximum strength
occurs, internal microcracking of concrete becomes too excessive to maintain increasing
resistance to increasing strain. The ultimate strain at crushing varies between 0.003 and 0.008,
but the maximum usable strain for plain concrete is about 0.003 to 0.004. The ACI Building
Code states that the maximum usable strain at extreme concrete compressive fiber is 0.003 in./in.
12,000
10,000
u,
o 8,000

U'
(l)
cl) 6,000
I ./ \
\
z
c,
c,
o
ffi
E 4,000
o
() ?::-z h--\"-**
2,000
z
0
@
0 0.0005 0.001 0.0015 0.002 0.0025 0.003 0.0035 0.004
Concrete Strain
The general form of stress-strain curves of lighfweight concrete (w. =100 pc is similar
to those of normal-weight concrete. However, light-weight concrete tends to be more flexible.
The stress-strain relationship depends on the compressive strength of concrete (f" ), age
at which the specimen is loaded, rate of loading, aggregate and cement properties, and type and
size of specimens. For example, higher loading rates lead to higher apparent strength but lower
deformability.
The following material properties are generally needed for design of reinforced concrete
members.
(a) Compressive Strength (f.): This value is obtained by a standard compression test on
6"x12" or 4"x8" cylinders, which are tested on the 28th day after casting the cylinders. The
compressive strength depends on the proportion of cement, coarse and fine aggregates, water,
6
cvB 482 BMS
and various admixtures that may be added. The compressive strength becomes higher when the
water-cement ratio is reduced. The commercial grade of concrete for residential foundations and
slabs is 3,000 psi, but f. :4,000 psi and higher is typical for structural frames.
(b) Modutus of Elasticity (8"): Concrete does not have a clear linear range. Unlike the
modulus of elasticity for steel, concrete modulus of elasticity (8") varies with concrete strength
(f .). Concrete modulus of elasticity depends, to a much lesser extent, on the age of concrete,
properties of the aggregate and cement, rate of loading, and the type and shape of specimen used
for testing. Several methods may be used to define E". Modulus of elasticity is fypically defined
as the slope of the straight line that connects the origin on the stress-strain curve to the point
corresponding to 0.25 f to 0.5 f although 0.4 f. is more common. In other words, the secant
" ",
modulus to 0.4f" is taken as E., as shown below.
f"
I
n" T-
fl c - --'-'-'-'-'- --t --
I
- 12
I
oo I
0.4r 6"
".-
t ,c tu gc
Based on statistical analysis of many test results, the ACI Code provides the following empirical
formula.
E,:33 *,'t $', r 9o pcf 1 ,yrc 1 16o pcf
where E. : modulus of elasticity in psi, w. : the density of concrete in pcf (lb/ft3), and f" :
compressive strength of concrete in psi. For normal-weight concrete (w" =145 pcf;, the equation
becomes
E,: 57000 ^ff,

(c) Tensile Strength: Uniform axial tension test of concrete is difficult. Therefore, tensile
strength of concrete is obtained by two different test methods. Note that the two methods would
indicate different strengths.
7
cvB 482 BMS
(1) Splircylinder tests - The test setup is shown below. The cylinder splits when the tensile
stresses reach the strength. Tensile splitting strength f is computed by the following equation.
2P
f",
nDL
where P: applied load;
D : diameter of cylinder; and
L: cylinder height.
Applied Load
Concrete
Poisson's Cylinder Tensile
Effect <- Stresses
Tensile strength has more variability than the compressive strength. The value of tensile strength
obtained from split-cylinder tests (f. can vary between 6Jf ana lrff which f": concrete
" "in
strength in psi. The American Concrete Institute (ACI) recommends
compressive a value of
6.7J\.
(2) Modulus of rupture test - This test involves bending of a plain concrete beam as shown in the
following figure.
P
(-a unreinforced
concrete beam
M','*:Pl2*a
The dimensions of the specimen are shown below.
I
t- cvB 482 BMS
I P12 P12 fa ll
o
t- I I
t-
o
îl
r
i
!'-
i
a=6tt 6" 6" Section A-A

From basic principles, the tensile strength at failure (i.e., modulus of rupture) can be computed
by knowing the maximum value of load P, as illustrated below
P is the maximum load at
w (P l2)a(h / 2) 3Pa failure, as measured by the
"f, I 1/ r2((h3 ) bhz
testing machine.
3P(6) P
Since a:h-b-6", this equation is simplifiedto f, =
6(62 ) 12
It should be noted that there is a large scatter in test data, and ACI $8.6
recommendsf,.:7.5hr[f" where f,.: modulus of rupture in psi, f.: concrete compressive
strength in psi, and I : is a factor to account for the use of lightweight concrete. For normal
weight concrete, I: 1, I = 0.85 for sand-lightweight concrete, andl,: 0.75 for all-light-weight
concrete.
Note that due to differences in stress distributions (concrete compressive stress distribution is
nonlinear when tensile failure is imminent, as assum ed in JT

f.. = 9
I
the modulus of rupture is
higher than the tensile splitting strength. For members subjected to bending, modulus of rupture
is a more appropriate indication of tensile strength.
(d) Concrete Quality Control
I
The strength and other properties of concrete are not precisely predictable. ACI sections
t 5.1 - 5.6 describe procedures by which adequate strength can be obtained, and provide methods
for checking the quality of the concrete during and after its placement.
L.
9
cvB 482 BMS
Design Methodology
(a) Working Stress Method
From 1900s to early 1960s, working stress design method was used. This method, which
is no longer included in the code, deals with service loads (also called working loads), i.e., the
loads which act on the structure. ln this method, stresses under service loads are computed by
basic equations such as f = + * , =ry. The members are designed such that the calculated
stresses are less than allowable stresses, which are a certain percentage of the material strengths,
i.e., f" and t. This method has a number of limitations:
1. Different degrees of uncertainty for various kinds of loads cannot be taken into account,
e.g., dead loads can be calculated more reliably than wind or earthquake loads which are
forms of live loads.
2. Creep and shrinkage cannot be easily accounted by elastic methods.
3. Concrete stress-strain relationship is not linear up to f"; hence, the level of safety
provided by working stress method is uncertain when a percentage of f" is used as the
allowable stress.
f.
q
0.6q
Actual concrete behavior
Linear behavior assumed
in working stress method
t actual t
ASSUln
e
Serviceability issues such as deflection, cracking, yielding of reinforcing bars, vibration, etc.
need to be checked for service loads
(b) Strength Design Method
Current ACI code is based on "Limit State Design Concept". In this approach, which is
more realistic, the strucfure is designed to satisfy different limit states as the behavior of
reinforced concrete member depends on the level of loading, as discussed in Chapter 3. The
10
CVE 482 BMS
most critical limit states are: (a) servicebility, i.e. deflection, cracking, yielding of reinforcing
bars, vibration, etc. for the loads which act on the structure (service loads); and (b) ultimate, i.e.,
the provided strength must exceed the demands due to factored loads (which are service loads
multiplied by toad factors). Therefore, the structure has to meet certain criteria under service
loads, and it also has to have adequate strength. The provided strength is computed based on
ACI methods which account for nonlinear behavior of concrete and cracking. The demands
under service and factored loads are calculated from structural analysis. Members are designed
for loads above normal use because (1) loads may change over the life span of the structure (i.e.,
the structure may be subjected to overloads); (2) design methods are simple and approximate;
hence, the actual capacity may be less than that computed; and (3) material strengths,
dimensions, and actual locations of bars could be different from design drawings; therefore, the
actual capacity may be less than the computed value. Note that safety factors have also been
incorporated in working stress design method, but the factors have little meaning so far as the
prediction of strength is concerned.
Safety in ACI Building Code is achieved by using factored loads (to account for over
loads) and strength reducton factors (Q). Load factors are used to increase service loads, and
strength reduction factors are used to reduce the nominal (also referred to as theoreticI)
capacities, i.e., the provided strength is the product of the nominal (theoretical) strength and
reduction factor. For instance, QMn >M. in which Q: strength reduction factor for moment, Mn
: nominal moment capacity, and Mu : demand computed under factored loads from structural
analysis; or QVn )Vu in which Q : strength reduction factor for shear, Vn : nominal shear
capacity, and Vu : demand computed under factored loads. Strength reduction factors are used
to recognize that code models, which we use to compute the capacities, are based on idealized
material and member models. We can predict some behaviors (e.g., flexural) better than others
(e.g., shear or torsion). In addition, some modes of failure are less desirable than others (e.g.,
flexural failure is ductile but shear failure is brittle without a waming and must be avoided). As
a result, reduction factors allow for a better control of mode of failure by using different
reduction factors, e.g., we use a reduction factor of 0.90 for flexure (for a well-proportioned
beam, i.e., tension-controlled) but use 0.75 for shear because of better predictability of flexural
strength and flexure failure is more failure.
Different types of loads act on structures. The primary loads are: dead lod (DL), e.g.
self weight (i.e., weight of members) or permanent fixtures such as partitions, pluming, light
fixture, etc.; Iive load (LL), e.g. occupants' weights, furniture, truck load on bridges, etc.; wind
Ioad (14/); erthquke load (E); eurth pressure (H); fluids, impact, temperature, and shrinkage.
Factoring the service loads allow for a better control to limit uncertainties regarding estimating
loads. Load factors have been calibrated to reflect uncertainties in estimating various loads. For
example, dead loads are easier to estimate than live loads; hence, the load factor for live loads is
higher, i.e., 1.2 for DL versus 1.6 for LL. The factored loads are combined to obtain the total
load. Load factors and combination of factored loads are different depending on the particular
case. Some examples of factored load combinations are listed below. Other cases are discussed
in ACI 9.2.1.
11
CVE 482 BMS
Condition Load factors

Gravity loads only I.4DL
I.zDL, T.6LL, O.5 L,
L. : roof load
Gravity and wind loads I.2DL,1.6L., l.OLL or 0.8W

I.2DL, 1.6W, 1.0LL, 0.5L,
0.9DL, 1.6V/
Gravity and earthquakc loads 1.2DL,1.0E, 1.0LL

0.9D, 1.0E
As an example, look at a simply supported beam. Since the live load can be over the entire span
or part of it, several cases need to be analyzed in order to calculate the maximum moment or
shear demands for design. Two cases are shown below.
1.611
1.zffir*
I
Case (a)
1.611
7
I .\-il^
r
Case (b)
Lt2 u2
Each case is analyzed and the larger value of the computed moment will be the critical moment
demand, i.e., Mu, or the critical shear, i.e., Vu. The concept of influence line will become useful
in selecting the most critical loading anangement in order to identify the most critical value of
moment or shear. The computed demands (M" and Vu) will have to be less than the
corresponding strengths (i.e., QMn and QV.) which are computed based on concepts developed in
this course.
Example In addition to its selweight, the beam shown below has an applied service live load
equal to lk/ft, 1.8 k/ft superimposed dead load. Under the working stress method the beam has
an allowable bending stress equal to 885 psi. Under the strength design method, the beam has a
nominal moment capacity equal to 55.56k-ft. Determine the following.
l2
r cvE 482 BMS
l' 1. Using the working stress method, is the beam sufficient for flexure?
2. Assuming that the beam's factored moment capacity is exactly equal to the factored moment
r demand, and that the beam's nominal moment capacity is equal to 55.56k-ft, determine the
moment capacity reduction factor, Q. This is a strength design methodology.
r
dI
l-
f
10'-0u l'-0u
Solution
t-
Part I
t Using the working stress method, the total applied load to the beam is
Self-weight:
12 t6
-x-
t2 t2 150 = 2001b I ft =0.2k I ft
DL:0.2+1.8 :2klft
w= DL* LL=2k I ft+tk I ft =3k I ft
t The moment demand for a simply supported beam with a uniform load is
Mdemand
wtz
(3k t ft)(toft)'z
=37.5k - ft
t 8
The maximum bending stress is

8
l, _ Mc _(37.5k- I)(12"1')(16"12)
o.t = 0.8791i = 879 psi
I (I2in)(I6in)3
L t2
Comparing the computed stress to the allowable stress

L
Ct=879psi 16o,, = 885psi <OK> .'.The beam is sufficient for flexure.
L Part 2
The factored load applied to the beam is

t
This is factored load.
w=(1.2)(2k t n+(1.6)(1k t n=+t t
1,
13
Lj

cvB 482 BMS
The factored moment demand is
M.clDtdnd
.- wtz (4k I ft)(roft)'?
1,,[u =50k- fr
8 8
It is given that the factored moment capacity, QMn, of the beam is 50k-ft. Using the strength
design method, the following relationship must be satisfied.
QM,>_ M,
Setting the left side of the equation equal to the right side of the equation and rearranging to
solve for the strength reduction factor, Q, we get its value.
QM,,)_ M,,
Q(ss.s6k- "ft)=sjk- ft '. The moment capacity reduction factor is @ = 9.9
Q =0.9
Tolerances and Accuracy of Calculations
Considering the uncertainties regarding behavior and characteristics of reinforced

concrete members, three significant figures (not three decimal places) are sufficient. Note that
the zeros before the first nonzero digit (zeros which are used to locate the decimal point) are not
considered when establishing the significant figures, .9., 0.0005030 has four significant figures.
The overall dimensions, clearances, and bar locations are not exact. Therefore, use whole
inches for beams, columns, and walls; %-inch increment may be acceptable for slabs if the
thickness is small; and 3-inch increments are usually used for footings and other massive
elements. Additional information about practical increments will be provided for beams, slabs,
and columns later when design of each member type is discussed. Typical tolerances for cross-
sectional dimensions of beams, columns, and slab thickness are +I12" and -I14": the plan
dimension tolerances for footings are 2" and -112"; cover to the reinforcing bars is -318" (if the
beam depth is less than about 8") and -112" (if the beam depth is larger than 8"); and the distance
from the compression concrete face to reinforcing bars is +318" if the beam depth is less than
about 8" and +112" if the beam depth is larger than about 8".
T4
r cvB 482 BMS
t-
r
t-
t-
t-
t
Chapter 2
t
Stresses under Service

Level Loads,
I
Deflection, Crack
t
t
widrh
L
L
I
L
15
cv 482 BMS
Behavior of Reinforced concrete Members at Different Limit states
A representative load-deflection curve for a reinforced concrete beam is shown.

Considering nonlinear stress-strain relationship of concrete and the fact concrete cracks when the
flexural tensile stress exceeds the tensile strength, the stress distribution will change at different
limit states as shown schematically in the figure.
Ultimate Load
Tension bars
v rgr N
(tc
t c"
J aa T-
Strain Stress
Forces
I)istributicn Distribution
{
c.
Servicc Load
T,
Strain Srcss
Forces
Distribution Distribution
ll
Cracking Load
c.
t"
c
9ct
ct
D
Strain Stless
Forces Deflection
a) Uncracked Section
Tensile stresses due to applied loads have not exceeded the tensile shength of the concrete.
This is a service load limit state. At this level of stress, a linear distribution of stress is
assumed over the depth of the section. Additionally, since the concrete in the tension zone of
the section has not cracked, the concrete contributes to the resistance to load. The following
strain, stress, and force diagrams are used for analysis.
t6
cvB 482 BMS
b -t r
Ct c {,
Cc
N.A.
t)
t $ c
rr
o t f., T S
Strain Strcss
Distribution Distribution orccs
Strain, stress, and force distribution in an uncracked section
b) Cracked section - Steel has not yielded
At this condition, the section has cracked. However, the reinforcing steel has not yielded.
This condition occurs at loads at or approaching service loads. The stress distribution in the
concrete in the compression zone is considered to be linearly distributed. However, since the
concrete in the tension zone has cracked, the concrete is considered to contribute nothing to
the flexural capacity of the beam. In this condition, the steel resists 100% of the tensile
stresses. The figure below shows the assumed stress, strain, and force distribution over the
depth of the section.
b rr
o
C
lo T S
Strain Stress
rorces
Strain, stress, and force distribution in a cracked section (steel has not yielded)
c) 'oUltimate" Load - Cracked section - Steel has yielded
This is the "ultimate" load, "ultimate" capacity condition. The section is cracked and the
reinforcing tension steel has yielded. In this condition, the stress distribution in the concrete
in the compression zone is parabolic. Since the section is cracked, the concrete in the tension
zone does not contribute to the flexural capacity of the beam. The reinforcing tension steel
resists 100% of the tensile stress. Since the steel has yielded and an elastic-perfectly-plastic
steel stress-strain relationship is assumed, the force in the tension steel is A.t. Where A. is
the cross-sections area of tension steel and t is the yield strength of the tension steel. It is
this condition that ultimate capacities are computed. The strain, stress, and force distributions
are shown in the frgure below.
l7
CVE 482 BMS
t_ b
t.. q
N.A. Cc
ct T
Strain Stress
Forces
Straino stress, and force distribution at ultimate loads
To simplify design calculations, the contribution of concrete beyoncl tensile strength is

ignored. That is, the concrete is assumed not to provide any resistance once the section cracks
(beyond "cracking" load). Up to service loads, the concrete stress is fairly small (less than about
0.25f to 0.35f hence, the concrete may reasonably be assumed to follow a linear stress-strain
" ");
curve. The resulting concrete stress distribution through the depth will be linear. Beyond service
loads, particularly under factored loads, the concrete stress-strain is no longer linear. Note that
we follow simple beam theory ("plane section before bending will remain plane after bending");
so the strain varies linearly through the depth.
Since the behavior changes as the load level is increased, we need to have different
methods to assess member stiffness and strength. In current design methods, we are concerned
about strength under factored loads (i.e., "ultimate limit state"); and deflection, cracking, steel
and concrete stress, and other serviceability issues for service loads (i.e., serviceability limit
state). Therefore,
for serviceability issues we primarily focus on (a) how to compute the moment of inertia,
(b) how to compute stress in concrete and steel stress, (c) how to compute deflections,
and (d) crack widths; and
for ultimate limit state, we concentrate on strength calculation methods that take into
account nonlinear behavior of concrete.
Therefore, in addition to having adequate capacity, reinforced concrete members have to

satisfy the following serviceability requirements:
o Steel stress under service loads must be within reasonable limits.
a Deflection under service loads must be within acceptable limits. Note that if the
member meets ACI minimum thickness (see Chapter 3), deflections do not need to be
checked.
a Crack width has to be acceptable.
18
I cvB 482 BMS
I Transformed Section Analysis
Since concrete and steel have different properties, most notably different modulus of
I elasticity, we cannot use familiar equations (e.9., o : My/I) that are applicable to homogenous
materials. In addition, the value of EI (which is needed for deflection calculations) cannot be
I computed because E is unknown, i.e., do we use E of steel or E of concrete? V/e, therefore, need
to obtain an equivalent section that is either steel or concrete. Since the section has to be
transformed, the method is called "transformed section" analysis.
I
I We use transformed section to compute steel stress, concrete stress, and moment of
inertia. These values are needed to establish whether (a) reinforcing bars yield, (b) concrete has
f- cracked or crushed, and (c) deflections are within reasonable limits.
I
I
The basis of transformed section analysis is that steel and concrete strains have to be
identical at the level of reinforcing bars. Transformed section is derived below.
(,c
N.A.
A. (total area
of steel)
t S f,
(a) Section (b) Strain Distribution (c) Stress Distribution
Concrete strain at steel level
: f./8. ; and steel strain (er)
I
: fr/Er. These two strains

t- have to be equal because
concrete and steel are
bonded together. By setting
the two strains equal to each
other, we get f ,: * -f ,.. t

t
8,"'
The value of E,/8. is called "CI':(}
f .
I
t- the letter "n". Therefore,
fr:n w means that
nA' (n-1
t-
19
cvB 482 BMS
steel stress is n times larger than the concrete stress at the reinforcing bar level. If we transform
steel, the actual area of reinforcement is replaced with an equivalent concrete area equal to nA.
(where A, : total area of reinforcing bars) so that the stresses will be correct in the transformed
section. Note that the concrete displaced by reinforcing bars is taken into account by using (n-
1)A'. If the section is cracked, then the transformed area will be nA, because the concrete in the
tension region is assumed to be totally ine_ffective, i.e., there is no concrete to be displaced.
' tcc f""
-+-
Strain Stress
Section
Distribution Distribution (n-1)4,
Uncracked Cracked
Section Section
Example 1
With reference to the beam shown below, calculate the location of the neutral axis and moment
of inertia for the gross (uncracked) transformed section, and cracked transformed section.
Assume f .: 4,000 psi and Grade 60 reinforcement ( f, : 60,000 psi).
10" x\
Concrete
/
compressive Steel yield strength
strength
Effective depth
10"
25" 23"
a
3 No.
a
I a
(a) Gross Transformed Section

25"
The transformed section is shown on the right.
E, = 57 ,0001f = 57 , 4,000 = 3,600,000 psi = 3,600 ksi

"
,,
E 29.000
- E, 3,600
(n-1)4"
20
r cvE 482 BMS
t- The area of the transfonned steel is (n-l)4.. The "wings" representing the transformed steel may
be assigned dimensions or viewed just as areas. These two views will give slightly different
results.
t- Approach I
In the first approach look at the transformed section shown. The transformed steel
area of 16.59 in.z is viewed as two "wings", each 1" (which is the bar diameter) by 8.295".
, 10"
t- f'l
tt
I
I
r-
I
I v
t-
.t
N.A.
25"
dr=1"
L
(n-1 )4. = (8-1 X3-0.79)=1 6.59
Standard methods are followed to establish the location of the neutral axis and moment of inertia
about the neutral axis.
_ il, 10 x 25 x12.5+2(1x8.295x23) ,. ^ !
I
"v
--
>A, 10x25+2(1x8.295) -
LJ.-ara.
Ig,,u,,,,,"d =l / 12(10)(25f + (25)(rc)02.5-13.2)2 +
zloxl:ss)x (23-r3.2)2 +r / t2(rf (zzsf=14,738 ina
I
okings"
t- The last term, which is very small (its value is 1.38), is the moment of inertia of the
about their centroid. The last term is small and is ignored. Therefore, in this class and elsewhere
I
the moment of inertia of bars about their centroid is commonly ignored, as illustrated in the
t- second approach.
1r
t-
2t
CVE 482 BMS
Approach 2 In this method, just the area of the transformed steel is used as shown on the right.
Therefore, only the distance to the transformed steel and area of the transformed steel are
needed. Once again, the standard methods are followed to compute the location of the neutral
axis and the moment of inertia.
,t.,l 10"
tt
tt
v-
N.A
25"
(n-1 )R" = (8-1 X3-0.79)=l 6.59
v
LA,r, r0(2s)(r2.s)+t6.s9(23),
-,aa:,^
>4 r0(2s)+ 16.5e
|e,.. ..,^ - ., = l
e lr(iltslornvd / 12(10 )(251 + e5)00)(12.5 -13.2)'z + 16.59(23- 13.2)2 = 14,737 ina
Note that the location of the neutral axis is the same between the two methods, as expected, and
the moment of inertia changes only by a very small value. All the future calculations will be
conducted based on the second approach.
Section to"
I
(b) Cracked Transformed
Cracked transformed section is similar to the section used for

tl 'l
gross transformed section except that the concrete below the v

neutral axis is ignored.
- N .4.
v
_LA,r, _t\(y )(0.sy )+18.s6(23)
\,n, Ioy'+18.96 25"
from which y- :7.6 in
22
(n){ = (8)(3.0.79=1 6.9U
t- cvF 482 BMS
t- Icrtronro,rn"d=l/12(10)(7.6)3 +(7.6)(10)(7.6 /2)2 +.96(23-7.6)2 =5,95gin4
Note that I", is substantially smaller than Ig; therefore, deflection of reinforced concrete members
t-
will increas e after cracking.
t- Example 2
For the beam shown in Example 1, calculate the cracking moment.

t-
Uncracked transformed section properties are used since the beam remains uncracked up to
reaching the cracking moment. Cracking occurs when the maximum tensile stress is equal to
I concrete tensile capacity, which is taken as the modulus of rupture, i.e.,
f, 7. I
c
f, =7.5h{f " =75x1.,ffi. = 474 psi Sur norn:al rveight ncrefe, i. : l, : .Bj
Mc feir sand-lightweight conrete, and: 0.?5 for
f I all-light-weighr concrere.
Mc M (25-13.2)
J,=-; 474 -i7--t, ) M",.=592,018 lb-in.=592k-in
See Example 1 for the values of moment of inertia and..c',.
Often, the cracking moment is calculated by ignoring the presence of reinforcing bars. That is,
the moment of inertia of the section is used only. If the steel is ignored, the beam is just a
rectangular beam - neutral axis at 12.5" from the top or bottom, and moment of inertia :
I I t2(10)(25)3 : I 3,020 ina.
Therefore,
MC M O2.5\
l.r = --i- : 474= -* = 494,000 lb_ in.= 4g4 k _ in.
-513,020 ;'-M...

I
L This cracking moment is about 20% less than the value based on using transformed section
analysis. Considering the variability of concrete tensile strength, it is acceptable to ignore the
steel when the cracking moment is computed; however, it is more precise to ccount foi steel by
using the transformed section properties.
Examnle 3 For a beam with the cross section shown in Example 1, calculate maximum
compresstve stress in concrete and stress i-n steel if the beam is subjected to (a) M:+45 k-ft and
(b) M:+90 k -fr.
I
L. (a) M: + 45 k-ft; note: positive means:

I
T-
23
CVE 482 BMS
Assume that under this moment, the section does not crack. Therefore, use the properties for the
gross transformed section, which were computed in Example 1
h4;l.. tcusil* rirrs:
f", (tensile stress in concrete) = +=ffi = 0.432 ksi = 432 psi
f, =7.sL'/ =7.5xl.,,ooo = 474 psi

f.t < f,; hence, the section does not crack, and the assumption is correct.
t!
Gs x l2)!13'z )
f'"(compressve stress in concree) = ' ryI - 14,737
= 0.484 tcsi = 484 psi
f, (stress in the bars) = )r?] - tl z l = 2.87s =2,870 psi

r41 = r(( t +s "ry14,737
)-
(b) M: + 90 k-ft
Check whether the section cracks when subjected to M: 90 k-ft.

( 90 x 12 ) ( 25 - I3'2 )
f,,(tensile stress in concrete) = ' ryI - = 0. 865 frsi = 865 psi > .f,
14,737
Therefore, use the cracked transformed section's properties as computed in Example 1.
f ,.(compressve stress in concrete) = = @l#9= = r,380 psi

+ 1 .3 8 lcsi
rgo t?l!?? - t'e l)

J, gtress in the bars) = nP
1 = r( " = rr., ksi= 22,300 psi
( s,e58 )--
Note that the linear behavior of concrete, which has been assumed here, needs to be verified.
Concrete approximately behaves linearly up to about
0.5 f.. f": 1,380 psi <0.5f. :2,000 psi. Hence, the
18"
assumed linear behavior of concrete is valid. Cases
for which this condition is not met are beyond the
scope ofthis course.
-
Example 4 V/ith reference to the beam shown,
compute (a) gross transformed section properties, (b)
cracking moment, and (c) cracked transformed section
properties. Assume concrete compressive strength (f")
irq
cNr c\l
is 6,000 psi.
6 No. 10
looao
24
r cvB. 482 BMS
r (a) Gross Transformed Section
The gross (uncracked) transformed section is shown below

t-
r
t-
t-
f-
t-
E 29,000,000
n=-= = 6.56
E 57,000{6,000
(n-1 )4,:(6.56- 1)x(6x 1 .27) : 42.4 i*
_ (t8)(24)(12)+ (42.4)(2t.s)
v _ (18)(24)+ 42.4
=12.85 in.
t Igtransformed: l/12(18X23+G8)(24)(12-12.55)2 + 42.4(21.5-12.82 :24,218in4
(b) Cracking Moment

L Since the section is uncracked up to cracking moment, the gross transformed section properties
are used to calculate the cracking moment (M.J.
L MC
.f,
I
M",(24-12.85)
L 7.sx lJ f \ =7.5xt.F,.ooo _
24,218
M ,.,. = I,26I,828 lb - in. = 1262 k - in.
L
L
I
25
cvE,482 BMS
(c) Cracked Transformed Section
hA.
nA, : 6.56(6x 1.27) :50 in2
fy- )(t8 )(iy- ) + s0(21.s )

v
t8(y- ) + 50
!- =8.5 in-
Icr)transfomred: l/12(18x8.5)3+(1SX8.5XS.5/2F+50(21.5-g.5)',: 12,135 irf

Example 5 For the beam shown in Example 4, compute the maximum compressive stress in
concrete and steel stress if the beam is subjected to (a) M:+100 k-ft, and (b) M:+300 k-ft.
(a) M:+100 k-ft
As computed in Example 4, the cracking moment is I,262 k-in. Therefore, under M:100 k-ft
(1200 k-in.) the beam will not crack, and the gross transformed section properties will be used
for calculating the stresses. If the cracking moment had not been computed first, then one would
have to use the following procedure.
Assume that the section will not crack under M:100 k-ft. Therefore, use the gross
transformed section properties (refer to Example 4 for the relevant information).
Mv (l00xr2)(24 -12'85)
f,.,(tensile stress in concrete) - I - 24,2r8
=0.552 ksi=552pst
f, =7'sLt[I =7.5xr 6,000 = 581psl
26
CVE 482 BMS
Since f", <f., the section does not crack.
000xtr2)(r2'85)
' = ryI -
.f ,.(compressve stress in cortcrete)
24,218
= 0.636 ksi= 636 psi
f"tressinrhebars)=n!-u.ru(rtoo'tz)(z+-tz'gs-z's)'l=r., u<si=2,8t0psi
1 [ 24,218 )
Note that f.<0.5fl"; therefore, the linear assumption used in the calculations is correct.
(b) M:+300 k-ft
This moment (3,600 k-in.) is larger than the cracking moment; therefore, the cracked
transformed section properties have to be used.
( 300 xtr2) ( 8'5 )

f, (compressve stress in ' ryI -
con*ete) =
12,135
= 2.52 ksi = 2,520 psi
inthebars)=r!=6.56((300x12)(24-s'5-2'5) l= tr., tcsi=25,300psi

.f,(stress
I [ 12,135 )
Note that f"<0.5f"; therefore, the linear assumption used in the calculations is correct.
Transformed Section of Doubly Reinforced Beams
ln addition to the main longitudinal bars placed in the tension zone, longitudinal bars can
be added in the compression region as shown below. Such beams are called doubly reinforced.
Transformation of the section is the same as before; however, the transformed section for the
compression bars is identical for the cracked and uncracked sections.
n-1)A (n-1)A
A'" = Total area of compression
O A ,s t
o ao
A O
A" = Total area of tension steel

n-1) hA,
Uncracked Cracked
Beam
Section Section
27
cvE. 482 BMS
Addition of compression bars (also called top bars) increases the moment of inertia. For
example, if 2 No. 6 bars are added to the beam in Example I (assume the distance from the top
face to the center of the bars is 3"), the gross transformed section moment of inertia becomes
15,370 in.4 lwhich is 4.3o/o larger), and the cracked transformed section moment of inertia
becomes 6,110 in.a lwhich is2.6p/o larger). Clearly, the larger the area of the compression bars,
the moment of inertias increase more. Therefore, addition of compression bars reduces
deflections (since the moment of inertias become larger).
Deflection
As part of serviceability checks, deflection of members needs to be computed.

Deflection is a function of EI (i.e., flexural stiffness) of the member. Since reinforced conciete is
made of steel and concrete, it is neccssary to establish an acceptable value of EI which accounts
for the contribution of reinforcing bars and concrete. For reinforced concrete members, modulus
of elasticity of concrete (Er=57000Jn) is used, but an acceptable value of the moment of
inertia is needed. If the section does not crack, gross moment of inertia (or gross transformed
moment of inertia.) is used. However, an effective moment of inertia (I.) nees to be computed
if the section cracks. Note that after cracking, the moment of inertia does not drop to the cracked
moment of inertia (I") suddenly. The actual value of moment of inertia is between I". and Ir.
ACI section 9.5.2.3 provides an empirical formula for this purpose, as follows. Branson
developed this equation, and it is sometimes called "Branson's equation."
M cr
,"=[)',..['-[ Icrc<I
M )']
Frrr nornral u,eight L:riilsrete, ?'-: 1.7, - 0.85
where fol sancl-lightrvcight cotlr*tc. antl l" : 0.75

lr all-lieht-r.vc:i ghI ollcrrtc.
: modulus of rupture : 7.sJ|(in psi units);
Yt
:distance from centroid of gross section (i.e., by ignoring steel) to extreme fiber in
tension;
M.r: cracking moment : fUyr;
Mu : maximum service moment in member at stage for which deflection is being
computed;
Ir: moment of inertia of gross secton neglecting area of tension steel; and
I.. : moment of inertia of cracked transformed cross section. (Note: Clearly, reinforcing
bars have to be included when 1",. is computed.)
The value of M., depends on the reinforcement, which may vary along the length of the
member, and the magnitude of Ma, which is usually not constant along the length of the member.
Therefore, I" as computed from above equation is not a single value along the length of the
reinforced concrete member. Therefore, a weighted average effective moment of inertia has to
-
Note: As discussed in Example 2, the difference between gross moment of inertia (i.e., if reinforcement is ignored)
and transformed gross moment of inertia (i.e., when reinforcement is included in the calculations) is small.
28
CVE 482 BMS
be computed. This value is between the values computed at the supports and midspan. The
following rules may used for this purpose.
(a) For sirnply supported beams, Ie : 0.5(lg+Ie,)
(b) If both ends are continuous ,I": 0.7 I.n. f 0.15 (I.r f I., )
(c) If one only end is continuous (say the left support) and the other end is simply
supported, I":0.85 I"n * 0.15 I.r
V/here
I, : uncracked transformed moment of inertia or moment of inertia of gross section (i.e.,
by ignoring steel)
I.. : effective of moment of inertia at the midspan, which may happen to be I, if the
maximum moment, which occurs at the midspan, is less than the cracking moment.
I.: weighted average effective moment of inertia;
I.l : effective moment of inertia at the left support; and
I.. : effective moment of inertia at the right support.
As an option, the ACI Building Code ($9.5.2.4) permits I" for continuous prismatic beams to be
taken as the value of I". (i.e., the effective moment of inertia at the midspan). For non-prismatic
continuous beams, the effective moment of inertia may be taken as the average of I. for the
critical positive and negative moment sections, that is, I" : 0.5 I.'n + 0.25 (I" * I". ). For
cantilevers, the effective moment of inertia at the support can be used for I.. For simple spans,
the effective moment of inertia computed at midspan may be used.
w = 0.3 l</ft
Examnle 6 The 10-ft long cantilever beam shown
below carries service loads consisting of a uniform
dead load (which includes the self weight) of 0.3 k/ft
and 4.5-kip concentrated live load at the tip. Compute
the immediate deflection at the tip for (a) uniform dead 10ft.
load only, and (b) the total load. The following
information is availabler Ig : 3,600 in.4, 1, : 2,000
in.4, M..:25k-ft, f
":2,770psi.
I
M (k-ft)
: M rs P=4.5k
(a) M" l5 k-ft; =,,= 0.0. t.O
w = 0.3 k/ft
Hence, the section remains uncracked under the
uniform load. The effective moment of inertia (1.) will
be equal to Ir.
E (' =57 000\n =57,0 2,770 = 3,000,000 psi 10 ft
For a cantilever beam with a uniform load, the tip

deflection is
M (k-ft)
29
CVE 482 BMS
. wl4
4--=
(0.3/ l2xl0
' xn)
=O.06in
8EI 8(3,000,000 / 1000x3,600)
Mo
(b) M,:60k-ft'M -9=z.qrt.0
2s
The section cracks uitn"fixed base and at all locations where M>M... Branson's equation needs to
be used.
t = [)'(3,600)+[ 1
[)'],',ooo,
=2,tr6 < I e
wlo | rol3 (0.3/ 12X10 xl2)a (4.sX10 xt2)a

^- l- + = 0.5I in.
8EI 3EI 8(3,000,000 / 1000x2,116) 3(3,000,000 / 1000x2,116)
Note that the deflection becomes significantly more after the beam cracks.
Example 7 A simply supported beam is shown below. The cross section of the beam is identical to
that used in Example 4. The beam resists its own weight, and a concentrated live load at its
midspan. Calculate the maximum short-term deflections under combined effects of the self-weight
(which is the dead load, DL) and the concentrated live load P. In case (a) use P:10 kips and in case
(b) use P:18 kips. Assume concrete compressive strength (fl.) is 6,000 psl.
n
I 1r
LL
, =f
y-l' , *[,- ly-l'.l,
"lM,J * L Ir,)]- <r
c
10'-0' 10'-0'
For Branson's equation, M". and I, need to be calculated by ignoring reinforcing bars.
l, : I I l2(l 8X24)3 : 20,736 in.a

MC
f,
I
. r- M (2412)
7.5x1./6.000- "
20,736
M,,. = 1,003,877 lb - in.= 1004 k - in.
I., (moment of inertia of transformed cracked section) : I2,I35 in.4, as calculated in Example 4.
30
t- cvB 482 BMS
t- Case (a)
Self weight : 0. I 5 x ((18x24)l 144) : 0.45 k/ft

t-
P,,L wrrl
Mtnax =- 48,
t-
0.4s(20)'?
M*^- =(10X20) +
max48 =72.5 k- ft
t-
M^*=870k-in'
r- Since M,',,u" is less than the cracking moment (M..: 1004 k-in.), the uncracked sectional properties
I
are used.
I
E"=57,00011=57, 6,000 = 4,415,200 psi = 4,415 ksi
AlltUL
P.E 5w .Ii t0(t2x20)3 *5(0.451 r2)(12x20)4
at-
max = 0.049,,
48EI 38481 48(4,4t5)(20,7 36) 384(4,4r5)(20,7 36)
Case (b)
P,, =1 8ki ps
"+
DL
10'-0' 10'-0'
PrrL , *or
Mmax =-
48
M._...
max48=(18X20) +0.45!2q'z =n2.5 k - ft= 1,350 k - in.
Since Mn,u* is larger than the cracking moment (M..: 1004 k-in.), effective moment of inertia based
on Branson's equation has to be used.
I
I
Ie =[ft)",.['-[ MMu l'.l,
))-
<I CT
i Note that once the beam

J
cracks, the deflection is
1,004
! I ( 20 73 6)+ (12,135)=15,637 <1, increased significantly.
['(ru)']
I
t" 1,350
i- A tlax _ Prrt , SworLa _ 18(12 x 20)3

+
5(0.45 lI2)(12x20)a
= 0.0985"
48EI 38481 48(4,415)(15,637) 384(4,4r5)(r5,637 )
t-
31
cvE 482 BMS
Crack \ryidth
ACI 10.6.4 - The center-to-center spacing (s) of reinforcement closest to a surface in tension
cannot exceed the value given by s=15[,19!00]-rq bur not greater than t2(40,000/;)
(./ )
where C. : the least distance (in inches) from surface of reinforcement to the tension face (i.e.,
clear cover to the bars closest to the surface). If there is only one bar or wire nearest to the
extreme tension face, s used in this equation is the width of the extreme tension face. f. (in psi)
is stress in reinforcement closest to the tension face at service load, and is computed from basic
principles using transformed section analysis. In lieu of such calculations, it is permitted to take
f' as 2l3ft where is the specified yield strength (in psi). For the usual case of beams with
Grade 60 reinforcement and 2-inch clear cover to the main reinforcement, with f, : 40,000 psi,
the maximum bar spacing is 10 inches.
Example I Determine whether the cross section shown below satisfies the ACI 318-08 crack
width requirements. Assume Grade 60 steel.
No information regarding the loads is given; therefore, the value of b=12"

f. cannot be Per ACI, fr:2l3fr:40,000 psi. #4 stirrups
Diameter of #4 stirrups
C.: I 5*05:2"
40'9001-r.rr oo'oool-r.rx2
.r= rsf
l, /: ) ' =,rl(4o,ooo/ = 10,, which is
1.5" cover to stirrups
1" clear between layers
' n(40'oo%qooo) = t2" All# 11 bars
The actual spacing between the bars is (12-2(1.5+0.5)-1.41)12:3.295" < 10". Therefore, ACI
requirements are met.
Example 9 The cross section of a reinforced concrete beam is shown. Assume fl. :4,000 psi
and Gr. 60 reinforcement. The T beam carries a service load moment of 3,200 k-in.
(a) Calculate the gross transformed section properties.
(b) Calculate the cracking moment.
(c) Calculate the cracked transformed section properties.
(d) Calculate maximum concrete stress and steel stress under the given service load moment.
(e) Check whether the reinforcing details satisfy ACI 318-08 crack width requirements.
32
r cvB 482 BMS
r
28"
l''
r
r ilc
I
t-
I.
o
=
(
6 No. 10
ooa
t I
\o o .
2112"
$ \ Line through the 2 314"

centroid of# 10 bars
l- J
L 10"
(a) Gross transformed section
L Assume y- is larger than6".
E 29,000,000
/r- --r--- -8
L Ec 57, 4,000
(n-l)4,:(8-1) x (6x 1.27) :

t 53.34 i*
L
33
l.,
cvB 482 BMS
.._ _ (28)(6)(3) + (10X24X18) + 53.3 )(25) 1^ ..

' -
.
L)'+o In'
=
eu@.@)(r4).5r3
Note: y larger than 6"; so the assumption is correct. Othet wise, we had to repeat the previous
calculations.
Ig)transformed : rll2(28)(O3+(28X6)(3-r3.4q2 ++Ur2(t0)(24)3+(10x24)(r8-r3.46)2+53.3(26-13.46)2
Ig)transformed : 44,094 itf
29"
(o
=
----- N.A.
b
(
(n-1)4.
\t
v
10"
34
r cvB 482 BMS
r (b) Cracking Moment
MC
r f, _cr.
I'
M","(30-13.46)
7.shJn =7sxlPoo =
t- 44,094
M
",
= 1,264,548 lb - in.= 1265 k - in.
r (c) Cracked Transformed Section
Assume y- <6".
t-
28"
t-
(o
t- N.A.
_-----------l_
t
1-
L
L
10 " ----
nA,: 8(6x1.27):61irf
L '( -)(r t 2 -)+61(26)
v (28)(y-) + 61
L !- =8.69 in.
t y- is larger than6"; hence, the assumption is incorrect. We need to recalculatey- with a new
assumed location of the neutral axis.
t
3s
t
cv,482 BMS
nA.: 8(6x1.27):61ir:f
(2sX6X3) +(y- -exrct(e *)rr--6)) 6te6)
y=
(28X6) +10(y- -6)+6r
!- =8.94 in.
Icr) transrormed : I I L2(28)(6)3 +(2 S ) (6) (8.9 4 4)2 + I I 12(10)(s.94-6)3+

(I Oxs.e4-6)(0. sx (s.e4 -q)2 +6r (26-8.92 :24,270 ina
29"
------------T-
(o
v'
_-__________!_

____ N.A
I
I
I
10"
(d) Stresses in concrete and steel under M: 3.200 k-in.
The given value of moment exceeds cracking moment (M", : 1265 k-in.). Therefore, use
crackcd transformed scction properties.
f. : My/I : (3200x8 .94)l(24270) :

1.18 ksi. The value is less than 0.5 I 2 ksi; hence, linear
distribution of concrete stress is reasonable and the computed stress can be used. ":
.'. L=l=l8-kst
f. : nMy/I : 8(3 200 x (26-8.9 4)) I (24,27 0) : I 7. 995 ksi : 18 ksi
36
"-'
r CVE 482 BMS
r (e) Crack Width Control
c" : 2.7 5-(1.27 12) : 2.t 15"

f-
,="[ry)-r,r"=',[ 40,000
I 17,995
-2.5x2.115 = 28.1" which is
, n(40'oo%7.
rnr) =
26.7,,
f.
.'. The controlling spacing is 26.8".
t-
The actual center-to-center spacing between the bars is clearly well below 26.8";
therefore, the beam meets ACI 318-2008 crack width control requirements.
t-
Note: If f. had been taken as2l3fr:40,000 psi,
t- 40,000
s=15 -r.r," = rrfo'oool-r.,
(40,000/
x2.rt5=e.7,,which is
.f, )
. r2(40'ooyn,
ooo
= r2,,
)
.'. The controlling spacing is9.7".
The actual center-to-center spacing between the bars is less than9.7"; therefore,
the beam meets ACI 318-2008 crack width control requirements. Note that the
simplified method results in a more stringent spacing than that obtained by using
the calculated value of fr.
t
t
L
t
L
37
l-
cvB 482 BMS
Chapter 3
Analysis and Design of

Rectangular Beams
38
cvB 482 BMS
Derivation of Stress Block Parameters
In lieu of dealing with the actual distribution of concrete stress, an equivalent stress block, known as the Whitney equivalent stress
block, is used to facilitate calculations when the flexural capacity of reinforced concrete members is computed. The actual and
equivalent stress blocks are shown below.
c
Yf' c t**S.*ffi
c t*ffif'*b# a F'c *T*
0.5a
xyf'*h
d=d. T:
t =Arf, T=A-f,
N.A
Stress
(a) Actual (b) Whitney Equivalent (c) Strain
Distribution Stress Block Distribution
Note: steel strain @ the level of extreme
tension reinforcement layer is termed e,.
The parameters in Whitney equivalent stress block have been derived so that the magnitude of concrete compressive force and
its location would match those if the actual distribution of concrete stress were used.
To keep the same compressive force (C)
a f'"b":y f'"ob i T:aca

a: ,c
a,
! v
,
39
t- cvB 482 BMS
r To keep the same location of the force resultant

1 /2a:Bc ;I/2,c:c :.,:2
t- The values of a and B were obtained experimentally, as tabulated below
The values of cr &
Bwere found from tests
f
t
<4000 5000 6000 7000 > 8000
r- (t
I
0.72 0.68 0.64 0.60 0.s6
0.42s 0.4 0.375 0.35 0325

.L
-1 0.85 0.8 0.75 0.70 0.65
^{: alt 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.86 0.86
Note that y does not change with the value of fln. and it is taken as 0.85.
The value of t, however, depends on the value of f". From the above values, Br is taken as 0.85
for f.<4000, and it decreases by 0.05 for each 1,000 psi beyond 4,000 psi. The value of Br
>0.65. Linear interpolation is used to compute B1for other values of f.. The following
equations and graph describe the variation of Br as a function of f ..
if f',<4,000 psi
0.85
( f '"-soool
,= 0.6s-0.2
t
4ooo J -fo, .f
'" between 4,000 and 8,000 psi
0.65 if -f '"> 8,000 psi

0.875
0.85
0.825
0.8
0.775
r 0.75
o.lzs
-
0.7
I
I . 0.675
t-
0.65
I
0.625
N
L. 0.6
1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000 7,000 8,000 9,000 10,000
f
I
f" (psi)
t- Note: The aforementioned discussions and values are for normal strength concrete with f" less
than roughly 9,000 to 10,000 psi. These values are NOT applicable for high strength concrete.
i
L-
40
CVE 482 BMS
Steps for Calculating Moment Capacity of R.C. Beams
1. Assume that the reinforcing bars yield; therefore, f, : &.
Important note: When bars yield, the struin n the bars (e) is not necessrly equal to
the yield strsin (ey); it typcally lrger than the yield strin. In the simplffied elastc-
perfectly plastic model that is used by ACI, the actual vslue of steel stran is not
important if the bars yield.
2. Maintain the equilibrium of internal forces (C and T : A, t), and compute the depth of the
Whitney stress block (a). From "a", compute the depth of the neutral axis (c) from a:Brc.
3. Taking advantage of the assumed linear distribution of strains, and the fact the concrete strain
(e") is 0.003; compute the actual value of steel strain (e,).
4. If e. is equal to or larger than the yield strain (e, : !/E.), the assumption is valid and go to
step 6. Otherwise, go to step 5.
5. Repeat step 2 but with the following modifications
o T: A, f.: A, . E, where q is a function of the yet unknown depth of the neutral axis
(c).
a From C :
T, a quadratic equation in terms of "c" is found. The solution to this
equation will give the value of "c".
a Knowing the value of "c", compute the actual value of e..
o Compute the force in the reinforcing bars, T: A. e. E,
6. The nominal (also called theoretical) moment capacity (M.) is computed by maintaining the
equilibrium of internal forces, i.e., T and C. Typically, the moments are summed about the
reinforcing bars.
7. The design or ultimate moment capacity (M") is 0 M". The value of strength reduction factor
(Q) is discussed later in the chapter.
Nole: In bcams designed pcr ACI provisions, which are discussed later, the reinforcing bars will
alv'avs ),ield. Step I is, hence, academic for properly designed beams. However, the validity of
yielding of reinforcement needs to be verified in all beams.
41
I CVE 482 BMS
t- Example 1 The cross section of a reinforced concrete beam is shown below. Assuming f" :
3,000 psi and Grade 60 reinforcement, compute the
t-
nominal moment (M").
b; k . l_
r
16" -l
-|
Assume that the reinforcement yields, i.e., f. : fv.
c:T; 0.85fl" ab:A,fn;

" J' o = \tl'''^')u.0,= 5.6"
t- 0.85x3x16
@
From the strain compatibility considerations, the
t- 0'003
s q =
c =d-c
=
following equation is derived ,% where
c\ C\
a:Brc or
t
a 5.6
6.592". Hence,
0.003 J
', o'85 6.592 21.5 - 6.592' 3 No. 10

t
er: 0.00678
o o
er: t/E,:60129000:0.00207. Since t5)y, the bars
yield, and the assumption is valid.
M..,, = A..f ..(a

J/-t\ - 5= (3 x t.27)60(2L
, s - Tl = 4274 k - in. This is rhe nominal (ideal,
2t 2
theoretical) capacity.
Example 2 The cross section of a reinforced concrete beam is shown below. Assuming f":
3,000 psi and Grade 60 reinforcement, compute the nominal moment capacity (M").
f. : t_ 20"
Assume that the reinforcement yields, i.e.,
C:T; 0.85f. ab:4,;
&. r
(6x1.56)60 11.0
,,_ =ll.o,,: =12.96,,
0.85 x 3x20 "= 0.85
Check the assumption
0.003
:
e, 0.00198<er. Therefore, =
t2.96 2t.5 - 12.96' s
=
c\
rf?
the assumption is not correct. Repeat the C\

calculations as shown below.
C:T; 0.85f. ab :4,f,; 0.85f"(B1c)b:A,e.E.;

6 No. 11
0.85(3 X0.85c)(20)=(6x I .56X29,000)e, ooooo
t^^
t .0.003_ s.
0.003_____j_
^ =
I c d-c' c 21.5-c
t-
I
Cornbine these two equations to get: 43.35c2+8I4.32c-I7507.88:0; c:12.79". Hence,

e,:0.00204
I
f,:E,t.=2 9000 x 0. 002 04:59 .2 ksi
t- 0'85 9
M,, = A,.f,(d - i)= (6 x r.56)5g.2(2t.t - \12'7 )= 8, 90 1 k - in.
L-
42
CVE 482 BMS
ANALYSIS OF IRREGULAR CROSS SECTIONS
Example 3 Compute the nominal flexural moment capacity for a beam with the cross section
shown below. Use f": 3,000 psi and Grade 40 reinforcement.
6rt 6rt 6rt
r 4"
(r\" (,+\
8rt
32"
17"
4 No.lO
o o o o-
Assume a 140' and the reinforcing bars yield.
: 0,003 0,85 f'.
-
q
t_
.-c
c:al1
.. f, ............+
T
Stroin Distribution STresses Forces
C:0.85fl.(aXl8) :45.9a
1: A,& :4(t.27)(40):203 kips
c:T; 45.9a:203: a:4.43" > 4"
Therefore, the assumption about a being less than 4" is not correct.
43
r CVE 482 BMS
t- Assume 4"<a<I2" and the reinforcing bars yield.

: 0,003 0,85 f'.
o
r
t' o
L_ C2.-C3
I
r-
i
t
Stroin Distribution Stresses Forces
c r:0.85(3)(4X 1 8): 1 83.6 kips

t C2:0.85(3)(a-4)(6): 1 5.3a-6 1.2 kips
C3:0.85(3)(a-4)(6): 1 5.3a-61 .2 kips
1:A'fi = 5.08(40):203.2 kips
T:C1*2*3; 203.3:6I.2+30.6a; a:4.64" > 4" o.k.
Check the assumption regarding yielding of the bars.

a:Brci c: 4.6410.85 = 5.46"
\vLLL'r)
From strain compatibiliry, w= .1'
0'003
= I - ; e.:0.013
c d-c' 5.46 29-5.46''"
er-- 1, I E,:40/2 9000:0. 00 I38
5>tyl so the bars yield as assumed in the calculations
Mn:C(29-2)+Cz
l*
-(^ . t?J
]
*,
l*
-(^ . t?)l :5441 k-in.
"%
L-
44
CVE 482 BMS
Strain Limits Method for Analysis and Design
This method is sometimes referred to as the unified method because it is equally

applicable to flexural analysis of members with mild steel or prestressing reinforcement. The
nominal (theoretical) flexural strength is reached when the concrete compressive strain in the
extreme compressive fibers reaches the ACI code-assumed limit of 0.003. At this concrete
strain, the mode of failure is fully ductile if strain in the extreme tension steel (called et) is
sufficiently large, i.e., equal or greater than 0.005, which means that steel would have yielded by
the time concrete strain reaches 0.003. The concrete beam section is characterized as tension-
controlled with ample warning of impending failure denoted by excessive cracking and
deflection. Tension-controlled sections are desirable because of their ductile mode of failure due
to yielding of reinforcement. On the other hand, if e1 is small (0.002 or smaller), a brittle mode
of failure is expected, with little warning of an impending failure. In this case, the concrete beam
section is characterized as compresson-controlled. Note that 0.002 is approximately the yield
strain of Gr. 60 reinforcement (e, : t/E, : 60129000:0.00207). A transitio zoe exists between
compression-controlled strain limit and tension-controlled strain limit (i.e., between st: 0.002
and 0.005). Tension-controlled and compression-controlled characterizations may also be
related to the depth of the neutral axis as shown below. Note that the tensile strain (e,) becomes
larger for smaller c/dt and vice versa.
tc 0.003 tc=o'oo3
---1 t-
f
LO
-1
F-
cf)
() E
O
il
o
q
O
lt
o
dt
\ t_
ato tt=0.005
\I
tt=0.002
Tensi on Controlled Compression Controlled
Note:
e, is steel strain (e") in the extreme tension steel.
dt is distance from extreme compression fiber to extreme tension steel
A balanced failure occurs when the steel strain is exactly equal to the yield strain (er) when the
strain in the concrete simultaneously reaches the "crushing" strain of g.: 0.003.
The depth of the neutral axis ("c") can easily be computed from similar triangles. If the section
is going to be tension controlled, which is preferred because of inherent ductility of such
sections, the depth of the neutral axis has to be 0.375dt or less. For a compression-controlled
section, the depth of the neutral axis is 0.6dt or larger. Note that e. is fixed at 0.003, and hence
the steel strain becomes larger as the depth of neutral axis becomes less, and vice versa.
45
t- cvE 482 BMS
t- As illustrated in Example 1, for a given set of material properties (i.e., fl" and t) and
beam dimensions, the area of reinforcing bars controls the level of steel strain. The steel strain
becomes less (the depth of the neutral axis becomes larger) as the area of steel becomes larger,
t- and vice versa. In other words, the steel strain varies inversely with respect to the area of steel.
Therefore, too much steel would result in a compression-controlled beam, and a smaller amount
of steel would ensure tension-controlled behavior. However, a minimum amount of steel has to
t- be maintained to ensure that the reinforced concrete beam does not behave like an unreinforced
concrete beam. If the flexural strength of the cracked section is less than the moment that
r produces cracking of the previously uncracked section, the beam will fail immediately and
i without warning after the first flexural clack forms.
r- To prevent such brittle modes of failure, a minimum amount of steel has to be provided.
I This lower limit can be computed by comparing the moment capacity of a reinforced concrete
beam versus an identical unreinforced concrete beam.
A"
ooo
Compute the flexural capacity of the reinforced beam shown above, and set it equal to the
cracking moment of the identical unreinforced beam.
Mn: A",ro-i) (6)

t - Mr,'C
I J,- I
t
(7)
7.s L,[7"+ 7.sxr,{7"+
M,,.: t.zs ,[7 n' b
0.s h 0.s h "
For typical beams, d=0.9h (or h=1.1d) M.' in Equation (7) is simplified to M", =1.5n,[-1bd' .
I
i- If assume that the intemal moment arm, i.e. (d-alz), is taken approximately as 0.9d Equation (6)
can be simplified to
M,: A, f ,.(0.9d) (8)
t-
46
CVE 482 BMS
By setting Mn from equation (8) equal to M". from equation (7), the following expression for
As,,-,in, which is the minimum required amount of steel, can be derived.
AJ,nlln
r.72 f" bd (e)
f,,
The ACI Building Code specifies a value that is approximately twice the value computed from
equation (9). Hence, per ACI $10.5.1
A,,î, : t arg er -(+ u a)* a(i r t) (10)
Note that all t and f. are in psi.
Note that per ACI $10.5.3, Equation (10) needs not be imposed for section in which the area of
tensile reinforcement is at least ll3 larger than the value required by analysis. This provision
provides adequate reinforcement for large members (e.g., grade beams) in which Equation (10)
would require large amounts of steel.
As the mode of failure changes from tension-controlled to compression-controlled, the nominal

capacity has to be reduced more because the mode of failure changes from a ductile type to a
brittle type. The variation of reduction factor (Q) is shown below. Note that the reduction factor
changes from 0.9 to 0.65. In the transition region, equations based on linear interpolation are
provided in terms of etor c/dt.
Note: The values shown here assume ties and
not spirals.
Ad 1A3.5 does not allow e, < 0.A04 tr Lowest possible
e, for beams per
for members with factored axial t
grygYe!{91U- ACt 3'18-2008
0.90
,4n = Gross cross-secfiona/
-r
-L
area of the member.
250
0.65 0=0.65+(t,-0.002) a
J

:0.65+0.25
I 5 I
cldt 3 l
t"#*sE*n bnsion
r\r1 Contro
;,*"il* I r 0t5
sl*,*#" Ic/d,=0.375
d, = distance from extreme cmpression I
fiber to extreme tension steel s.=0.004
^ ild,=37
Note: For tension controlled region: e,:0.005 or c/d, :0.375: and
02 or
47
CVE 482 BMS
This figure suggests that it is more efficient to design beams in such a way that Q is 0.90.
Moreover, for members with axial load less than 0.1f.As the value of tt cannot be less than
0.004 (or c/dt cannot be more than 317). Typical beams fll in this category, s the axial load in
most beams is zero. Therefore, for typical beams with zero axial load the lowest value of Q :
0.48+(0.00 4-0.002)(250/3) : 0.8 1 6.
As discussed previously, having too much steel would result in a compression-controlled beam,
which is not desirable because of its brittle mode of failure. Moreover, the ACI code states that
for beams the value of e1 cannot be less than 0.004 (or c/d1 cannot be more than 317). The larger
the value of 4., the larger the value of c/dt (and the less the steel strain). By setting c/dt equal to
3l7,the maximum value of A, can be computed.
t-b-t * "&*' ,_]- ra *trr d\ft}

0^*L,/ " Uq"-\"?
1\
*T #=* "*ffif',.m*
0.5a

d,=d
N.A.
A*
I .---------T=4.f"
a a o
Stress Distribution Strain Distribution
d: effective depth, which is the same as d, for beams with a single layer of steel
T : Arfy is force in bars
e. : 0.003 is the usable concrete strain used to compute moment capacity per ACI
L-l
0.85fl. ab: A.fy; 0.851.B1cb: A,fy
Calculate the maximum allowable value of A. by setting c equal to 3l7dt which is 3l7d for bars
with a single layer of reinforcement.
0.85f .B r (3 17 d)b : A,,n,u*& This eq*ati*n is vatrid ONl'1'

tbr rectiu:grlal L:ein:s r.vith l-l
p3 t j)bd silglc nyer *i reinf)rcement.
A _0.8sf _0364
.s. max
" f, f, "bd
Example l(a Compute the design flexural strength for the beam in Example I
At s. :
0.003, steel strain, which is also since there are no other layers, is 0.00678 - see
Example 1. This value is larger than 0.005; hence, Q:0.90. Alternatively, we can use cldr:
48
cvB 482 BMS
6,592121.5 : 0307 , which is less than 0.375; hence, Q : 0.90

Mr:0 Mn: 0.9 (2,440) :2,200 k-in.
,\S ${{o
Examnle 2(a) compute the design flexural strength for the beam in Example 2
At t. :
0.003, steel strain (e.), which is also t since there are no other layers, is 0.00204. This
value is between 0.002 and 0.005; hence,
Q = 0 6s* (r, - 0.00r)[?) = o.u, + (o.oozo+ - o.ooz[f = o.u,

)
Alternatively, we can use clrt: 12.79121.5 :0.595, which is between 0.375 and 0.6; hence,
I r sl
Q=0.65+0.25
Mu:0
l+:) = 0.65 +0.25 t___t
Mn:0.65 (8,901):5.786 k-in.

I o.srs r .]
0 65
Note that this beam does NOT meet ACI 3lS-2008 requirements of c/d a3/7 or e0.004. Note
that we would reach the same conclusion if we compare the provided area of steel versus the
maxmum allowable area of steel, as shown below.
Area of 6 #1 I bars
.
/
0.364,
t lrf '-bd
c 0.364x 0.85 x 3 x 20 x2t.5
.r, max- - s'Ptovtded = 9.36 in2
J, 60
Example 3(a) Compute the design flexural strength for the beam in Example 3.
At " = 0.003, steel strain, which is also t1 since there are no other layers, is 0.013. This value is
larger than 0.005; hence, Q: 0.90. Alternatively, we can use cld: 5.46129: 0.188, which is less
than 0.375; hence, 0:0.90.
Mu:0 Mn: 0.9 (5441) :4.896 k-in.
49
CVE 482 BMS
Use of "Flexure-ACl 2008.x1s" for Example I

ANALYSIS & DESIGN OF FLEXURAL MEMBERS
Version 6,2
Copyright 1995,1996,1997,1998,2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005,2006,2008
Baham M. Shahrooz, Ph.D., P.E., FACI (Unversity of Cincinnati)
Ths spreadsheet computes moments of inerta, flexural capacity, P-ll intercton diagram according to ACI 3t8-2008
The 3ecton may have a hole. The hole 3 essumed to be symmetrical wlh respect to the mino x3 of bendng.
lf automalic calculation in Excel s not on, you nd to press F9 aftr inputting th dete.
Automatic c.lculation can be tumed on from Toolsroptionsrcalculation.
lacro socurity has lo bo sot t Medum (s Optonsrsecuritt/Mcro Socurity).
INPUT DATA
Noler Units are kios and inches.
Enter data only in the BLUE spaces below.
3.00 (Concrete @mpressive strength)
60.00 (Renf orcement yeld slrength)
E"= 29000.00
0.0030 (Maximum concrete compressive strain) Note: Ths value s 0.003 perACl.
16.00 (Wdth olweb) th teb lebld 'T6ms
br= 0.00 (Width ot flange) Reclangular Shape" tgr definitons.
24.00 (Overall depth)
0.00 (Flange thckness)
hr= 0.00 (Dstan from top of secton to top of hole)
hz= 0.00 (Distan from top of secton to bottom of hole)
0.00 (Wdth of hole)
Manual seleqton
Steel Layer No. of Bars Barsize ofA Dstn frcm the top of the section
1 '10 3.81 21.500 tin. Rqulrcd Are. of len!o Steel l the Seclon lr B (Arhb) = 1.117 i"
2 0.00 0.000
0.00 0.000
4 0.00 0.000
0.00 0.000 Stlol nfo (Totl rF. of stolrcr !lion.l .m) = 0.99%
6 0.00 0.000 Thir r.lio muil ot rxcxd 8% prr ACl, but kxp b.twrnl% to 3% for oplimum columN.
7 0.00 0.000
0.00 0.000
th tab labled "Driling of R{angular Shape" to
9 0.00 0.000
check the gometry. !q;feji!jeii!..1!!ejIl!A
10 0.00 0.000
shoM usl a6 6 check to make sure that the @ct
umber of baF has ben entered.
Distance from top of section to loton of P = '12.00
ls top of section in compression? yes (yes or no)
Consder dsplaced ncrete? yes (yes or no) Note: Typilly, dsplaced ncrete s consdered.
hput lhe values of applied axial lod & bendlng momnt whlch er beng checked.
P (k) M (k-in)
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
OUTPUT
G ross transformed section propertes
l. - 21065.559 (Gross transformcd momcnt of incrtia)
!b.,' 12.7219 (Dstanc to N.A. masurcd from comprcssion facc)
M., - 767.290 (Cracking momrnt in kip-inch)
Cracked transforrned section propertes
f., - 91733n (Crackcd transformed moment of inrtia)
y.= 7.7888 (DistanctoN.A.measuredfromcompressionfacc)
Moment capacty or Zeo Axial Load
c 6.5917 of N.A. mcasurcd from
Mn' 4274.15t (Nominal momcnt capacity in klplnch)

o 0.900 (Strngth rcduction facto for zeto axial load)
Mu= 3A6.7Tt (Dcsign momcnt capadv n klp-lnch)
50
cvB 482 BMS
Use of "Flexure-ACl 2008.x1s,' for Example 2

Verson 6.2
Copyright I 995, I 996, 1 997, I 998, 2OOO, 2001, 2002, 2003, ZOO4, ZOOS, 2006,2008
Bahram lll, Shahrooz, Ph.D., P.E,, FACI (University of Cincinnati)
Th! rpredlheel computos moments of nertia, flexural cp.cty, P-m ntoncton dgrm .ccording to ACI 318-2008
The sction mty have hols. The hole 3 lsumed lo b symmficl wth r6pect to the mnor xr of bnding.
lf rulomlic clculelion in Excol s not on, you nd o p3s F9 .ttar npung lhe datt.
Aulomtic c.lculation csn bo tumed on frcm TlsroptioNrcelcullton.
[cro socu]ty h3 to be sot at f,odum (! Optionsrsccurtyrtcro Socurity),
INPUT DATA
Note: Units are kis and inches.
3.00 (Concrete compressve slrength)
60.00 (Renforment yield strength)
E"' 29000.00 (Stl modulus of elasticM
0.0030 (Maximum concret compssive sfain) Not: Ths vlue 8 0.003 perACl.
20.00 (Wdth of reb)
the trab labeled 'Tem6 lor
br= 0.00 (Width of flange) Reclngular Shape" for defntlons.
24.00 (OveEll depth)
tr= 0.00 (Flange lhickness)
hr= 0.00 (Dsten fm lop of seclion to top of hol)
hz= 0.00 (Dstan from top of secton to bottom of hole)
0.00 Wdth of hole)
Manual selec{ion
Steel Layer No. of Be Bar Size of ,\ Dstrn from the top of ths section
16 11 9.36 21.500 tln, Requlld Ant of Trmld Sol lt tho SGc0on l . Be.m (Ar,"h) - ir33 t#
2 0.00 0.000
3 0.00 0.000
4 0.00 0.000
5 0.00 0.000 Strd no (lot l rn| ot !.lrc .*liontl .n|) s 1 .95%
0.00 0.000 thr nlio nud trot rrcd 8% prr ACI but kf,p bltrrnl% b 3% for optmum colnE.
7 0.00 0.000
I 0.00 0.000
o
0.00 0.000
10 0.00 0.000
Distan from top of section to lolon of p = 't2.oo

ls top of section n compresson? yes (yes or no)
Consider dsplad ncrete? ys (y6s or no) Note: Typically, displaced concrete is nsidered.
lnput lh vluo3 of apled .rl lod & bsnding moment which re bslng chackld.
P (k) M (k-in)
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
OUTPUT
Gross transformed section propertes
l, = 29067.665 (Gross transformed moment of inertia)
ybar = 13.3219 (Distance to N.A. measued from compsson fece)
t", = 1118,213 (Cncking moment in kip-inch)
Cracked transformed section propertes
f", = 18161.977 (Gracked transfomed moment of inerli.)
yer = 9.9996 (Distance to N,A, measured from compression face)
Moment capacty for Zero Axial Load
12.7912 of N.A. measured from
tn= (Nomintl moment capacity in kip-inch)

o (Strength reduction factor for zero axial lod)
tu= (Design moment cepacity in kip-inch)
51
cvB 482 BMS
Use of 'oFlexure-ACI 2008.x1s" for Example 3

Verson 6.2
Copyrght 1995,f996,1997,1998,2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005,2006,2008
Baham il, Shahrooz, Ph.D., P.E., FACI (University of Cincinnati)
Ths Bprcadsheet computes moments of inia, flexuiel capacty, P-ll nteracton dagram accordng to ACI 318-2008
The !ction may have a hole. The hole s ssumed to be symmetrcal wth rspsct to the mnor axe of bending.
lf automatic calculalon in Ex6l i3 not on, you need to press F9 aftor inputtng the data'
Autom.tic calculaton can bo tumed on fm Toolsroptionsrcelculation.
ftl.cro security has to be sot et t dum (!oa Optonsrsocurityrltecre Socurity)'
INPUT DATA
Note: Units are ks and inchs.
Enter data only n the BLUE spaces below.
3.00 (Concrete compressve stength)
40.00 (Reintorcement yield slrength)
E"= 29000.00 (Steel modulus ofelastcity)
=
0,0030 (Maximum concrete mpressve stran) Note: Ths value s 0.003 per ACl.
18.00 (Wdth of web)
the tab labeled "Tems for
bf= 0.00 (wdth of flange) Rectangular Shape" lor defnitons.
32.OO (OveEll depth)
tr= 0.00 (Flange thickness)
4.00 (Dstan fiom top of section to top of holo)
hz= 12.00 (Dstan from top of secton to bottom of hole)
6.00 (Wdth of hole)
Manual selecton
Steel Layer No. of Ba Barsize ofA Distan from the lop of the secton
14 10 5.08 29.000 Iin, RoqulrcdAa ofTenlon Steel lllhe Secton s Bem (Aqb)= 2.610 int
2 0.00 0.000
0.00 0.000
4 0.00 0.000
0.00 0.000 Stl ntio (lotrl aF of rbolrcr@ !tonal aH) = 0.96%
6 0.00 0.000 Thir r.lio musl not.xcd 8% p.rAcl, but krp brtwsnl% to 3% for oPtmum colun.
7 0.00 0.000
8 0.00 0.000
labolod "Oriling of Rectangular Shpo" to
I 0.00 0.000 check the geometry. _Nq:fbellqjl9jhel!3lg
10 0.00 0.000 shoM ust as e check to make sure that lhe rec't
number of ba has been enled-
Oistance from top of section to loton of Pn = 16.00
ls top of section in comprcssion? yes (yes or no)
Consder dsplaced concrete? yes (yes or no) Note: Typilly, displaced concrete s considered.
lnput lhe values of applied xil lod & bending momont whch a being checked.
P (k) M (k-n)
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
0.00 0.00
OUTPUT
Gross transformed section propertes
fn= 51418.512 (Gross transformed moment of inertia)
Y. = 17.6337 (Distance to N'4. measured from compression face)
M", = 1470,270 {Cracking moment in kip'inch)
Cracked transformed section properties
1", = 22546.112 (Cracked trensformed moment of inertia)
Yar = 10.5382 (Distence to N.A. measured from compression face)
Moment capacty lorZero Axial Load

c= 5.459f of N.A, masured from
Mn= 54/,0.470 (Nominal moment capacity in kip-nch)

o 0.900 (Strength reduction factor for zero axial load)
Mu= 4896.423 {Design moment cepacity in kip-inch)
52
CVE 482 BMS
Flexural Formula for Rectangular Beams with a Single Layer of Reinforcement

Reinforcement in beams designed according to ACI code will yield; hence, in the
following discussions the steel stress (f.) is taken as yield stress (t). Stress and strain
distributions are shown below.
b
\
t. &sf' --]- &**t.t*3
0.5a
a=F,,c t=.S$f'-ab

d,=d
N A
A"
I7
O o o ------"---f=ff{
Stress Distribution Straln Distribution

d: effective depth, which is the same as dt for beams with a single layer of steel
T: A.& is force in bars
e. : 0.003 is the usable concrete strain used to compute moment capacity per ACI
: T; 0.85f" ab: A.!; Af

C Cl= (1)
0.85f
M": T(d-al2) (2)
".b
A,f,
Substitute "a" from Eq. I into F,q.2. M,, = A,f ,,
d _!
2 0.85f
r
AfJ/t' "b
M',= A,f,, a- ,"b f\J,/ 3l llhis ctuliott is rftltl ONI.Y ftsr slid rcilnsnlor bcnms.
1.7 f
For preliminarv desisn. this equation may be approximated as M, = 0.9 A,f ,d

For beams with a single layer of reinforcement, a quantity called reinforcement ratio may be
defined as p:A./bd. A. in Eq. 3 can be replaced by pbd. Therefore,
M,, = A,? #h)= ou,(, #h)= oa= r,l'-, -fl

It is often practical to aim for 0.6Ar,nu*. Therefore, Eq. 3 may be simplified as follows
0.3648,f
M A,f"- d_
Af
,"1
d-
0.6
T)"bd\f
1.7 f )=,'Pry*) f, r.7 f ,"b
"b
,"
o.2t, [r - o. t2slfbd'? f ', - Ttbd2 f Sc* T:rblc llr vnlur.s ol't'
53
t- cvB 482 BMS
I Table I - Value of q for different

f" (psi)
concrete compressive strengths
n
<4000 0.16s4
r- 4100 0.1645
4200 0.t637
f- 4300 0.t628
4400 0.1619
4500 0.161 1
r-
i 4600 0.1602
4700 0.ts94
t- 4800 0.1 585
I
4900 0.t576
5000 0.1568
5100 0. l 5s9
5200 0.1550
s300 0.1542
5400 0.1 533
5500 o.ts24
5600 0. 1515
5700 0.1507
5800 0.1498
s900 0.1489
6000 0.1480
6100 0.t47r
6200 0.1463
6300 0.1454
6400 0.1445
6500 0.1436
6600 0.1427
6700 0.1418
6800 0.1409
6900 0. r400
7000 0.1391
7100 0.1382
7200 0.1373
t
7300 0.1364
7400 0.1355
I
I 7500 0.t346
, 7600 0.1337
7700 0.1328
I
I 7800 0.13 19
t, 7900 0.13 10
>8000 0.r301
L.
54
CVE 482 BMS
DESIGN FOR FLEXURE
General Remarks
The basic design equation is Mu l0 Mn, where Mu is the ultimate moment demand, Q is
the strength reduction factor, and Mn is the nominal moment capacity (supply). Any section may
be used so long as the capacity (0 M") exceeds the demand (MJ; and ACI requirements on
minimum amount of steel and ACI 10.5.1 are met. However, beams need to be practical as
discussed next.
There are two typical design cases
(1) The beam dimensions are known a priori, e.g., for architectural reasons the width and
depth should be certain values, or the depth cannot be smaller than a value to ensure that
the deflections would not become excessive. In this case, we have to compute the
required area of steel to resist the demand. Calculation of the beam self-weight (part of
the dead load) will be straight forward, as we know all the dimensions.
(2) Generally, the overall dimensions are not known, and we have to size the beam to resist
the applied loads. In order to compute the moment demands (i.e., Mu), we have to
estimate the beam self-weight, and check it once we have computed the overall
dimensions. Although there are no set rules to estimate the self-weight, the following
rules are useful to get a good starting point.
a. Typically, the weight of a rectangular reinforced concrete beam is l0% to 20o/o of

the total loads it must carry.
b. The beam depth can be estimated to be roughly 8% to l0o/o of the span length, and
choose the beam width approximately as one half of the depth.
It should be noted that these are just some approximate rules, and the idea is to get an
idea about the beam self-weight. One may use the average of the self weights from
method (a) and (b).
The main design steps are summarized in the following. Keep in mind the practical
considerations that will be discussed next.
1. Estimate the dead load (self weight) of the beam. (Note that this step will not be
necessary if the given dead loads include the self weight of the member.)
2. Calculate the maximum moment (M") based on the estimated dead load.
3. Obtain a trial section based on Mu<QMn where M,=nbd2f'". Remember that this
equation was derived based on a target steel area of 0.64..u*. The value of Q is typically
taken as 0.9 because the design objective is to have a tension-controlled beam.
4. Recalculate the self weight based on the trial section obtained in step 3.
5. Recalculate the maximum moment (M,) based on the new self weight found in step 4
55
cvF. 482 BMS
6. Establish an approximate value of required steel area (Ar) from M,, <QMn where Mn :
0.9A.fyd.
7. Select bar sizes.
8. Calculate the capacity of the selected beam and bar sizes.
9. Check the capacity from step 8 versus the target maximum moment found in step 5. If
the capacity is about 5o/o or less than the target moment, proceed with shear design
(Chapter 6), detailing (Chapter 9), and sketching the beam cross section. If the capacity
exceeds the target moment by more than 5o/o, revise the section by changing the cross
section, bars, or a combination of both and go back to step 4 and repeat steps 4 through 9.
Practical Considerations
1. Make sure that the selected area of steel is between 4.,*in and Ar,'nu". It is often practical to
aim for 0.64..u*. Moreover, it is economical and practical to target for beams that are in
tension-controlled region, i.e., beams for which c/dt<0.375(or eu >0.005).
2. Follow ACI7.7 minimum cover requirements
3. Round up width and depth to the nearest inch, and often to the next multiple of 2 inches. For
slabs, the total depth is increased to the nearest ll2 inch if the depth is 6 inches or smaller;
and to the nearest inch if the depth is larger than 6 inches.
4. Maximum material economy often leads to effective depth (d) = 2 to 3 times width (b).
However, note that wider than deeper beams are usually more economical when the cost of
the entire building is taken into account. Shallower beams would result in a lower total
building height, which translates into savings because of less cladding, wiring, etc. through
the building height. In addition, wide flat beams (same depth as slab) are easier to form than
beams projecting below the bottom of slab.
5. Do not use No. 14 or No. 18 bars in beams and slabs. These bars are used in columns. Use
the largest bar size that will meet design requirements. Larger bars reduce the quantity and
therefore the placing costs. It usually takes as much time to place one small bar as it does
one large bar.
6. For beams, it is more economical to use bars in single layer only
7. You can mix different size bars to get the required area of steel, but the bars should be of
comparable diameters. For example, limit the variation in diameter of bars in a single layer
to two bar sizes; say No. 8 and No. 10, and not No. 10 and No. 6. Keep in mind that it is best
*
Not. that if we use Gr. 60 steel, this relationship is simplified to A, =
MM
In this equation.
ffi= fr
Mo is in k:dT and d is in inches. Also. beam is designed to be tension-controlled. i.e.. :0.9.
56
CVE 482 BMS
to use or specify fewest possible bar sizes for a given project.

8. Place bars symmetrically about the vertical centerline of the beam cross-section.
9. Follow the ACI provisions to maintain a minimum distance between adjacent bars. You can
refer to the following table. It is best to make beams wide enough to avoid minimum bar
spacing because deformed bars that rub against each other take longer to place.
Maximum No. of bars in a single layer

me 3/4tt max. size and No. 4 s
Beam Wdth (inches)
Bar size
I 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
3 3 5 6 I I 10 12 13 15 16 18 19 21
4 3 4 6 7 I 10 11 12 14 15 16 18 19
5 3 4 5 6 I I 10 11 12 14 15 16 17
6 2 4 5 6 7 8 I 10 12 13 14 15 16
7 2 3 4 5 6 B I 10 11 12 13 14 15
I 2 3 4 5 6 7 B I 10 11 12 13 14
I 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 I I 10 11 12 12
10 2 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 I I 10 11
11 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 I I I 10
14 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 I I
18 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 6 6
10. Provide a minimum number of bars in a given layer to ensure that crack widths will not be
too large. The minimum number of bars should not be less than two. The following table
may be used a guide.
Minimum No. of bars as a si in beam stems

Beam Width (inches)
Bar size
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
3 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4
4 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4
5 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4
6 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4
7 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4
I 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4
I 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4
1A 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4
11 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4
Note: For # 11 bars in an 8-inch wide beam, only one bar can fit.
I l. One may bundle two, three, or four bars, especially in large beams or columns. These bars
are assumed to act as a unit with the area equal to the total area of the bars. Per ACI 7 .7 .4,
minimum specified concrete cover for bundled bars shall not be less than the equivalent
diameter of the bundle, but need not be greater than 2 in; except for concrete cast against and
57
t-
cvE 482 BMS
permanently exposed to earth, the concrete cover shall not be less than 3 in. Some typical
bundle shapes are
ffi WW
1
WWW
2. Unless a larger value is needed for strength or a smaller value is required due to floor height
restrictions, use ACI minimum thickness:
ACI TABLE 9.s(a)

MINIMUM THICKNESS UNLESS DEFLECTIONS ARE COMPUTED
Member Simply One end Both ends Cantilever

Supported continuous Continuous
One-way Slab Ll20 Ll24 Ll28 Llt0

Beams or Llt6 L/l8.5 Ll2r Ll8
ribbed one-way slabs
Notes:
L : span in inches (L is usually taken as center-to-center spacing between the supports.)
The tabulated values assume normal weight concrete and Grade 60 reinforcement. For
lightweight concrete (W.:90 to 115 pcf), multiply the tabulated values by (1.65-
0.005W.) >1.09 where W. is in pcf. If & >60,000 psi, multiply the values by
(0.4+fyl100,000).
13. For a line of continuous beams, keep the beam size constant and vary the reinforcement from
span to span to accommodate different moment demands throughout the spans. Two sizes of
beams can be considered if the maximum moment on a beam is more than l00o/o higher than
that on typical beams. In addition, savings in formwork and shoring will be realized by
making all beams and joists the same depth. Such a strategy will reduce or eliminate
structural interferences with mechanical ducts and piping ducts. Heavily loaded beams on
long spans can be made as wide as necessary, up to four to five times their depth, to carry the
load.
14. Width of beams should be as wide as, or wider than, the columns into which they frame so
that bars in the corner of the beam and bars in the corner of the column can pass
unobstructed. In addition, it is cheaper and easier to cut a hole in the bottom of a beam form
for a column penetration than it is to cut holes in the side of a column form for a beam
penetration.
15. Specify high-early strength concrete to permit early form stripping if the time saved avoids
winter concreting, reduces total construction time, andlor has other advantages.
58
cvE 482 BMS
ACr MTNTMUM CONCRETE COVER (ACr 7.7)
Condition Min. Cover (in.)
(a) Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth a

J
(b) Concrete exposed to earth or weather:
No. 6 through No. 18 bars 2
No.5 bar and smaller,'W31 and D31 wire and smaller 1.5
(c) Concrete not exposed to weather or not in contact with ground:
Slabs, walls, joists:
No. 14 and No. l8 bars 1.5
No. 11 bars and smaller 0.,75 ,
Beams, columns:
Primary reinforcement, ties, stimrps, spirals 1.5
Shells, folded plate members
No. 6 and larger 0.7s
No. 5 bar and smaller, W31 and D31 wire and smaller 0.5
MINIMUM BAR SPACING LIMITS PER ACI
;\lthough not recluired by ACll, it

is a goori practice to alsc make
sure that the clear distances are
not less than 1.33 diilmeter of
cr'sr aggregate.
Larger of
Bar diameter
1 inch
>1 i
Note: For typical cover of 1.5" to stimrps, the distance from the bottom of the beam to
K the center of the first layer of bars is approximately 2.5".
59
,--.-
r CVE 482
BMS
t- Example I For architectural reasons, a simply supported beam has to be 24,, wide by 24,, deep.
The span is 26 ft. Compute (design) the necessary ieinforcement to resist the
maximum moment
due to the applied loads. In addition to its own dead load (self weight), the beam
carries a
t. superimposed dead load (DL) of 1 k/ft and live load (LL) of 2.45 k/ft. ssume
Gr. 60 sreel, and
3,000 psi concrete, i.e., f": 3,000 psi.
24"
t-
To produce the largest possible moment, the live load
must be on the entire span.
t-
"6tL
I .zDL
t
ooo
Setf-weish ,: ( ?+"2+1 x 150:600 lb/ft : 0.6Wft
[144) [t w',.}..rh
Mu: Ir.zqr+
0.6) + t.6(2.4s)fzu'
8
:494k-t ftr'd q
Try d = 24-2.5 :21.50'(This relationship assumes 1.5" clear cover to No. 4 stimrps.
The need
for stimrps to resist shear is discussed in Chapter 6.)
The beam is being designed to be tension-controlled; hence, steel yields and

is used in the
select 0 : 0.9.
calculations. Moreover, the use of Q: 0.9 results in a more efficient beam; hence,
As derived previously, Mn = A,f d-

Af
t"t
f
,,
I r.7
t
o,f, "b Af
Therefore, M,, = QA,f,. o-l.7f,"b)
) = o.gA,f, d-
t":'
. Substitute the value of Mu in
r.7 f '"b
this equation and solve for A, based on the estimated value of d.
494x12=0.9x A,x60 2t.s* I' x 60 I Solving the resulting quadratic equation gives A,
L7 x3x2a )
: 38 in.2 and 5.9 in.2
,t _0.364tf '.bd=F=Bin-
0.364x 0.g5 x3x21.5x24
.
'1,.,,,o* --T
f, ftLf 0
t-
NI4
60
cvB 482 BMS
/r-
Asrrrr-tnax.ofltlf"
't.. f' t
I",0(pguo\=
uo )
)
max.off.Fooo
" 60,000 (24x2rs)),"t[k,, 4x2t ,)= r.72 in2
[
The acceptable value of A. is 5.9 in2
Use6No.gbars,whichprovideA.:6in2. In a24-inchwidebeam,gNo. gbarscanfitanda

minimum of 3 No. 9 bars are needed. Therefore, 6 No. 9 bars meet the requirements on the
minimum and maximum number of bars. Note that 3/c" maximum size aggregate and No. 4
stimrps are assumed.
Check the capacity with the selected number and size of bars
d : 24- (1.5+0.5+1 .12812) 2t.4" :
:
where 1.5 cover
:
0.5 diameter of No. 4 stimrps
I.I28l2: radius of No. 9 bars
C:T; 0.85f : A.t;
0.85(3XaX24): 6(60); a: 5.88"
"ab
a: Brci c: 5.88/0.85:6.92"
cld: 6.92121.4: 0.323 <0.375
.'. Tension-controlled
IV'e can reach the same conclusion by computing e1.
0'003= I ' 0'003= t' r-":1:0.0063>0.005 .'.Tension-controlled
c d - c' 6.92 21.4 - 6.92' ""
The beam is tension-controlled; hence, 0:0.9.
M,, =il EA"f,(,
' - *=
r.7f,,b)
0.e x otoot( z1.a--i(trI-l = s,qs t k - in= 4e8 k - Jt
'\ t.7(3\(24))
Mu ,.qu;."6 : 494 k-ft
The beam is over designed by 0.88%, which is acceptable. Therefore, 6 No. 9 bars are used.
l, 24" -l
I 1
/
Stir"r-ups are used tc
resist shear, as
eliscussed in
hapter 6"
sN
6No.9
II
61
r cv,482 BMS
t- Example Design a simply supported beam to resist a service dead load of I.27 k/ft (which
2
includes the self weight of the member) plus a service live load of 2.I5 k/ft. The beam span is 15
ft, and the material properties are fl. :4,000 psi and : 60,000 psi.
t-
1. Calculate the maximum moment:
The maximum moment occurs when the live load is over the entire span. Therefore, the
r- maximum moment will be
I t.z(t.zt) + t.6(2.1 s)] l 5:
|.-
M".=L=140k-rt
I
2. OUtuin u t.iul r..ti8on,
M, Since we are designing a tension-controlled

M,, < Q beam, Q is 0.9.
M,=qbd2f," 9
140 x 12 <0.9 M,
140x12 < 0.9(0.165bd'f '")
I40xI2< 0.9 x 0.165 x bd2 x 4
bd2 >2,822in3
Many combinations of b and d may be selected to satisfy bd2 > 2,822. The minimum
depth to avoid deflection calculations if the beam is not supporting brittle panitions from
ACI Table 9.5(a) for a simple span is L/16. Therefore, hmin : (I5xI2)lI6: 1I.25" say
12". lf we aim for h,nn, d=h-2.5=9.5"; and from bd2 > 2,822 the value of b> 31.3", say
30".
Choose 30"x12"
3. Calculate an approximate value of required reinforcement for the trial section:

M,, = 0.9A,f,d ;
M, = QU.9A,frd = O.\lA,fd
d =h-2.5 = 9.5"
t
l40x 12:0.814. x 60 x 9.5; Ar:3.64 in2
t
This area of steel may be provided by 5 No. 8, which gives A, :3.95 in2. Note that
13 No. 8 bars fit in a 3O-inch wide beam assuming that 3A in. maximum size
aggregates and No. 4 stimrps will be used. A minimum of 4 No. 8 bars has to be
t
placed in a 3O-inch wide beam. Therefore, 5 No. 8 bars meet the requirement for
minimum and maximum number of bars.
I
i- 4. Calculate capacitv of the selected beam:
I d :
12- (1.5+0.5+1 12) : 9.t"
t- where 1.5 cover :

0.5 : diameter of No. 4 stimrps
I
Il2: radis of No. 8 bars
L.
62
cvB 482 BMS
Provided A,: 5 x 0.79:3.95 in2
C:T; 0.85f"ab : A.t; 0.85(a)(a)(30) : 3.95(60); a:2.32"

a: Brci c:2.3210.85
:2.'/3"
cldt: 2.7319.5: 0.288 < 0.375 .'.Tension-controlled
'We
can reach the same conclusion by computing e1.
0.003 0.003 e
c d - c' 2.73 9.5-2.73'-'
Check the requirements for minimum and maximum area of steel.
tmrn
- max.orFJ
"t f, uo)",0('g uo\=
) l, )
200
ona(
(60,000\ '')
max.of(zJqJm,oxq.sll
'[60,000 r30xe.s)l =0.e5 in2
]
AJ,max _0.364nf' "bd _ 0.364x0.85x 4x 30x 9.5 _ { RRir2

f, 60
Therefore, the provided area of steel is between Ar1 rrd Ar,nu*
As fn 3.95 x60
M,, = QA,.f d = 0.9 x 3.95 x 60 n., _ ) = 1,779k - in = I48k - ft
,,
1.7 f '"b 1.7 x4x30 )
'I'his capacity is 5.9Yo larger than the target capacity of 140 k-tt, and is reasonably
acceptable.
5. Sketch ofbeam cross section:
No.4 stinups
c{
5 No.8
1 .5" clear cover to stirrups

t_ 30"
63
r
I
cvB 482 BMS
I Another Desien
In order to reduce the amount of steel, a deeper beam may be selected. If we set b=0.5h,
t- andrealizing that h=1.1d (or d=0.9h), a new value of h can be computed from bd2 > 2,822.
(0.5hx0.9h2> 2,g22; h> 19.1" say 20"
t- Use a l0"x20" as the new trial section.
r
I
M, = 0.9 A,f,d ; M, = Q0.9 A,f d = 0.81A,d

d =h-2.5 = 17.5"
l40x L2: 0.814, x 60 x 17.5; A, : 1.98 in2
This area of steel may be provided by 2 No. 9. Note that3 No. 9 bars fit in a l0-inch
wide beam assuming that % in. maximum size aggregates and No. 4 stimrps will be
I
I used. A minimum of 2 No. 9 bars has to be placed in a l0-inch wide beam.
I
Therefore, 2 No. 9 bars meet the requirement for minimum and maximum number of
bars.
2. Calculate capacitv of the selected beam:
d: 20- ( 1.5+0.5+1 .t2812) t7 .4" :

:
where 1.5 cover
:
0.5 diameter of No. 4 stimrps
l.I28l2: radius of No. 9 bars
Provided Ar:2 x 1.0 : 2.0 in2
C=T; 0.85f"ab : A.; 0.85(a)(a)(10) : 2(60), a: 3.53"

f a : Brci c :3.53/0.85 : 4.15"
cld: 4.15117.4: 0.239 <0.375 .'.Tension-controlled
I
I
We can reach the same conclusion by computing e1.
t
0.003 0.003 t
s : tt :0.010 > 0.005 .'.Tension-controlled
J . S .^
c d _ c, 4.Ii = l7 A: 4 i
I /r-
t- ts"'-max.orlW;
' bd )",0(ryuo)=
[ ) \f, ) -f,
t. 4,000
max of
60,000
(r0 x 17.4))'"a(ffirro x rz.+l) = 0.580 inz
L;
64
L
cvn 482 BMS
AJ,max _0.364nf' "bd _ 0.364x0.85x4x 10x 17.4 =3.59in2

.f, 60
Ar**.
Therefore, the provided area of steel is between As nd
A'f' 2x6o
Mu QA,f, d- r.7f'"b)
=0., xzxeo( r7.4-
( 1.7x4x10
=1,689k-in=l4lk- ft
This capacity is 0.71% larger than the target capacity of 140 k-ft, and is acceptable.
20'
l- 10' -l
65
cv 482 BMS
Example 3 A simply supported beam is to carry its own dead load (self weight) plus a uniform
service live load of 1.75 l</ft and a uniform superimposed service dead load of 1 k/ft. The span is
33 ft. Assuming f. : 3,500 psi and : 60,000 psi (Grade 60 reinforcement), design the beam.
That is, calculate the required cross-sectional dimensions and reinforcement. Sketch the cross
section.
Solution:
l. Estimate the self weisht:
The weight of a rectangular reinforced concrete beam is about I0o/o to 20o/o of the loads it
must carryr. This range corresponds to 0.3 k/ft (i.e.,0.1"(l+1.75) = 0.3) to 0.6 k/ft.
Alternatively, estimate the beam depth (h) as roughly 8%o to l0%o of the span, and the
beam width (b) as one half of the depth. This method gives h: 2.6 ft. to 3.3 ft. with b :
1.3 ft. to L.7 ft. Hence, the beam self weight will be between 0.51 k/ft to 0.84 k/ft. Based
on these four values, the beam weight is estimated to be about 0.5 k/ft.
2. Calculate the maximum moment for the initial trial section:

The maximum moment occurs when the live load is over the entire span. Therefore, the
maximum moment will be
,, _ [r.2(l + o.s) + 1.6(l .7s)] 33: - vLw^ J
3.
M,, < Q M,, Since we are designing a tension-controlled beam, Q is 0.9

M,, = nbd2.f ',
626x12 < 0.9 M,,
626 x 12 < 0.9(r7bd' .f '
\ f't 6'{
")
626x12<0.9 x0.165 xbd2 x3.5
bd2 > 14,453in3
Many combinations of b and d may be selected to satisfy bd2 > 14,453. The minimum
depth to avoid deflection calculations if the beam is not supporting brittle partitions from
ACI Table 9.5(a) for a simple span is L/l6. Therefore, hmin : (33x12)l16:24.8" say
26". If we aim for hn,,in, d =h-2.5=23.5"; and from bd2 > 14,453 the value of b> 26.2", say
26"
Choose 26"x26"
hh
4. Evaluate the trial section:
a Recalculate the self-weight and maximum moment
Beam self weight: 0.15 x (26112) x (26112):0.704Wft
66
cvE 482 BMS
|.2(t +0.704)+ 1.6(1.75)] 33:

M- u = 660k - ft
8
a Calculate an approximate value of required reinforcement for the trial section
M, = 0.9A,fd ;
M,, = Q0.9A,fd = 0.8l4,f,d
d =h-2.5 = 23.5"
660 x 12:0.814, x 60 x 23.5; A.:6.93 in2
This area of steel may be provided by 9 No. 8. Note that 11 No. 8 bars t in a 26-
inch wide beam assuming that% in. maximum size aggregates and No. 4 stimrps will
be used. A minimum of 4 No. 8 bars have to be placed in a 26-inch wide beam.
Therefore, 9 No. 8 bars meet the requirement for minimum and maximum number of
bars.
d :
26- (1.5+0.5+1 12) : 23.t"
where 1.5 : cover
ll2: radius of No. 8 bars
Provided A. : 9 x 0.79 :7.1I in2
C:T; 0.85f"ab : A,; 0.85(3.5)(a)(26):7.1l(60); a:5.52"

a : Brci c :5.5210.85 : 6.49"
cldt : .49123 .5 : 0.28 <0 .37 5
6 .'. Tension-controlled
We can reach the same conclusion by computing e.
0.003 e 0.003
: ----i- e
:
= tt :0.0079 > 0.005 .'. Tension-controlled
6.4g
s
c d-c'
',S:6A9,
This observation should be expected as we targeted for about 0.64r*u*, but we need to
check to ensure that the beam is indeed tension controlled.
Check the requirements for minimum and maximum area of steel. Note that this check is
not really necessary because we aimed for 0.6Ar.u*, but perform this check to double
check the numbers.
_ max.or( tJ
t nrn up uo I
"I f, uo)
) ",0(lf, )=
2oo (26x23.5\\=2.04
max.orfsoo
" ,ze x z3.sll ora( n=
[ 60,000 ) (60,000' '
)
67
cvB 482 BMS
, 0.364,f ', bd 0.364 x 0.85 x 3.5 x 26x23.5 , , . 2

/L
''max 60
-
r L,tt
-f ,
Af 7.11x60
t srt'f
Mu =A d- '"t' = 0.9 x 7.llx60 23.s_ ) =796!k - in= 664k - ft
r.7 f 1.7 x 3.5 x26 )
This capacity is just 0.55%
"b larger than the target capacity of 660 k-ft, and is acceptable
/\r- No.4 stirrup 26"
1.S"clear to stirrup
9No.8
26"
t--l
Note that the bars at the top are needed to hold the stirrups while concrete is poured.
These bars contribute to the capacity, but their effects have been ignored here. The
additional capacity due to the bars located in the compression region (called
"compression bars") will be discussed later in Chapter 7.
ltr Desien
In order to reduce the amount of steel, a deeper beam may be selected. If we set b=0.5h,
andrealizing that h=1.ld (or d=0.9h), a new value of h can be computed from bd2 > 14453.
(0.5hx0.9h12> t+453; h> 329 insay 32"

Use a 16" x32" as the new trial section.
1. Calculate the self-weight and maximum moment:

Beam self-weight : g. 1 5 x ( I 6 I l2)x(32 I 12) : 0. 5 3 3 k/ft.
t'r -LIl.ztr + 0.533) + 1.6(l.75)-lr-=632k-ft

tvr
33:
- g
68
cvE 482 BMS

M,, =0.9A,f,d ; 4, = Q0.9A,f,d = 0.\lA,f,d
d =h-2.5 = 29.5"
632 x 12:0.814. x 60 x 29.5; A,: 5.29 in2
This area of steel may be provided by 5 No. 10. Note that 5 No. 10 bars fit in a 16-
inch wide beam assuming that% in. maximum size aggregates and No. 4 stimrps will
be used. A minimum of 3 No. 10 bars have to be placed in a 16-inch wide beam.
Therefore, 5 No. 10 bars meet the requirement for minimum and maximum number
ofbars.

d : 32- (1.5+0.5+1 .27 12) : 29.37"
where 1.5 : cover
1.2712: radius ofNo. 10 bars
Provided A. : 5 x T.27: 6.35 in2
C:T; 0.85f"ab : A.t; 0.85(3.5)(axl6): 6.35(60); a: 8.0"

a: Brcl c:8.0/0.85 :9.42"
cld: 9.42129.37 : 0.32I <0.375 .'.Tension-controlled
We can reach the same conclusion by computing e1.
0.003 t 0.003
=t t. : 0t :0.009 > 0.005 .'. Tension-controlled
c d - c' 9.42 29.37 -9.42'
This observation should be expected as we targeted for about 0.64..u*, but we should
M,,L= QA,f,( -,1.7f',b)

!{:,1 = o.n x 6.35 xeo(t-zost-, jis=iuo,- = s,6qqr
- 1.7x3.5xl6) v'v"t\ - in =72sk - Ji
' r'''[ o
This capacity is l5% larger than the target capacity of 632 k-ft,'which is over designed.
4. Revise the desisn:
we can use a smaller beam (e.g., 16" x30"), use fewer bars, or a combination of both
a First, let's try placing fewer bars. Because the beam size is not changed, the self-weight,
maximum moment, and effective depth do not change.
Use 4 No. l0 bars (4,: 5.08 in2)

C:T; 0.85f.ab : A.t; 0.85(3.5)(a)(16) :5.08(60); a: 6.4
a : prc, c:6.410.85 :7.53"
69
t- cvE 482 BMS
t- cld: 7 .53/29.4 : 0.256 <0.375 .'. Tension-controlled

t- s.os(60)
2s.4_ I =7187 k-in=599k- ft
1.7(3.sx16) /
I This beam 5.2o/ounder strengthened, and it is not acceptable.
r a Try using a smaller beam. Try a I6"x30'o beam.

I
E Recalculate the self-weight and maximum moment:
Beam self-weight : g.1Jx(30112) x(I6lI2) : 0.50 k/ft.
I
M- [r.z1r + o.s) + 1.6(1.7s)] 33'z
u
8
=626k_ rt
El Calculate an approximate value of required reinforcement for the trial section:
M, = 0.9A,fd; M,, = Q0.9A,fd = 0.8lA,fyd

d =h-2.5 = 27.5"
626 x 12 : 0.81A, x 60 x 27.5; A,= 5.62 inz
6 No. 9 bars provide 6 in2,butwon't fit in one layer; hence, select 5 No. l0 bars in
one layer that provide 6.35 in2.
Assuming that% in. maximum size aggregates and No. 4 stimrps will be used, 5 No.
l0 bars can fit in 16".
For a 16-inch wide beam, the minimum number of No. 10 bars is 3. Hence, 5 No. 10
bars meet this requirement.
E Calculate capacitv of the selected beam:

d: 30- (1.5+0.5+1 .2712):2'7.4"
where 1.5" = cover
0.5": diameter of No. 4 stimrps
I.2712: radius of No. 10 bars
L
C:T; 0.85f.ab: A.t; 0.85(3.5)(aX16) : 6.35(60); a: 8.00

a : Brcl c :8.00/0.85 : 9.42"
cld : .42127 .4 : .344 <0 .37 5
9 0 Tension-controlled
.'.
'We
I
can reach the same conclusion by computing e1.
t 0.003 t"r ----==
0.003 t.-=
= ^_. lts:t:0.0057>0.005
c d - c' 9.42 27.4-9.42'"" .'.Tension-controlled

t
This observation should be expected as we targeted for about 0.64,n,,u*, but we need to
f
L-
Check the requirements for minimum and maximum area of steel. Note that this check is
L
70
iJ
CVE 482 BMS
not really necessary because we aimed for 0.64rn'u", but perform this check to double
check your numbers.
/r-
t.m,,, . f,
-max.ofltlf" uo and
('l!uo
I l. )=
max.orf'fo
" (16x27.4) x274\) = 1.46 in2
(. 60,000
)*r(#,k,',
AJ,max _0.364tf '"bd _ 0.364x0.85x3.5x16x 27.4 = j.9,in2
f, 60
Af 6.3s(60)
^_1.7(3.sX16) IJ =8023k-in=669k-ft
r s/t'
M,, = QArf, d- = 0.9 x 6.35(60) )7
t.7 f
"b
Mu ..qu."6 :626 k-ft. The beam is 6.9 o/o
over designed, which is reasonable.
Note: If the beam is made 16" x28" with 5 No. I0 bars, the maximum moment
becomes 621 k-ft and the capacity becomes 614 k-rt, which s 1.13% under
strengthened.
E Sketch ofbeam cross section:

l- 16" -l
-l
l-
4
stirru ps
5 No. 10
Note that the bars at the top are needed to hold the stirrups while concrete is poured.
These bars contribute to the capacity, but their effects have been ignored here. The
additional capacity due to the bars located in the compression region (called
"compression bars") will be discussed later in Chapter 7.
7T
t- cvB 482 BMS
t- EXAMPLE ILLUSTRATING BEAMS WITH MULTIPLE LAYERS
As discussed previously, tension steel may be placed in more than one layer. The
t- following examp le i llustrates two different calculation procedures.
Example For a beam with the cross section shown below, calculate the nominal and design
t flexural strength. Assume Gr. 60 steel and f": 5,000 psi.
r
I
l_ 10" -l-l
I
24 1g"
3" 5No.8
/
y(rt'om bottom of beam) -zT-

_Z _ A,r, 3x 0.79 x3 + 2 x 0.79 x 5
3x0.79 +2x0.79
= 3.8"
W"T.$-,
The beam may be viewed as a beam with A, : 5x0.79:3 .95 in.2 located at 3 .8,, from the bottom.
Therefore, d : 24-3 .8 : 20.2" .
.
.1r'max
0.364,1'-bd 0.364x 0.80 x 5 x t0 x20.2
- -s'Provided
-f , 60
yield.
I
t_
o,f, ')
M,r= Arf, o- ) :3.95 x 60 20.2_ 3.esx60
1.7x5x10/ =
4126k-in. }i/.o: 4126k-in.
I
I
1.7 f '"b
)
L-
C:T
I
'- 0.85fl. ab: A.t;

A,f,
n=-------:::-
3.95 x 6o (Qtt
=(
0.85f',b 0.85x5x10
L
72
cvE 482 BMS
c: al:5.58/0.8 = 6.97"
cl d :1fu : 6.97 121 : 0.332 <0.37 5 Hence, tension controlled and Q:0.90.
Mu : 0.9(4126 : 3713 k-in. M,,:3713 k-in.
Method 2: Use the bars as siven.
Assume bars in both layers yield.
C: T; 0.85f" ab = A,1t + A.z&

0. 85x5xax I 0 : 3x0.7 9x60+2x0.7 9x60:237
a:5.5'76"
c : a/B:5. 57 610.8 : 6.9'7 I"

Check the validity of the assumption regarding yielding of the bars er: 60129000
0.003 "t 0.003 "t

s.r :0.00604 > :0.00207 o.k.
!r_" 6.971 2t- 6.97t'
" Note: cnr is rvhat ACI alls e,.
0.003 _ Eu 0.003
=" t.z:0.00518 > e, :0.00207 o.k.
, !r_" 6.971 t9 - 6.971'
Calculate Mn by summing the moments about C.
Mn : Tr(yr -al2)+T2(y2-al2):3x0.79x60(21-5.57612) + 2x0.79x60(t9-5.5i612): 4t26k-in.

Mn:4126 k-in'
cld: 6.971121 :0332 Hence, tension controlled and Q : 0.90. The same
< 0.375
conclusion is made by realizing that et (which is er1) is larger than 0.005.
M, : 0.9(4126:3713 k-in. M,_= 3711kin.
A more general method, which does not rely on making assumptions regarding yielding of bars,
is discussed in Chapter 7.
The two methods do not generally yield the same exact values, particularly if one layer does not
yield. However, the calculated moments are typically very close to each other, and the first
approach is acceptable for hand calculations.
73
r cvE 482 BMS
t-
f-
t-
r
t-
t-
Chapter 4

T Beams
L
L
74
L
cvE' 482 BMS
Main Components of Floor Slab System
Reinforced concrete beams are typically built integrally with a reinforced concrete slab.
As a result, most beams do not actually have a rectangular cross section. A portion of a typical
floor system is shown below. As. seen from this figure, the beams in the longitudinl and
transverse directions look like T or L shaped beams. A portion of the slab effectively works with
the beam to resist the loads. It is important to know how much of the slab can be considered to
be part of the beam. (Note that a T beam with an effective flange width can be obtained for the
beams in the longitudinal and transverse directions. For an edge beam, an "L" beam can be
derived since the slab is on one side only.) This portion of the slab is called effective flange
width.
A:Effective Overhanging Flange Width T-Beam,
Typical
x ve Effective
Widrh Slab Transverse
Beam
:t4b
L-Beam
Spandrel or /)o^
Edge Beam
Clear Distance To Next Vy'eb

Longitudinal
Column
Beam
75
r
CVE 482 BMS
Positive and Negative Moment Regions in T Beams
Compression
B Zone
(a)
Section B-B
B
Tension
Reinforcement
Compression
Zone {wyXr?!ei4 w!rr"*rd"
*ftoyr,
Section A-A *"wta"4rryffi*ii
(c)
Moment Diagram
positive Moment: Tension on the bottom NOte: CaSeS (a) and (C)
Negative Moment: Tension on the top are basically rectangular beams.
Note: The slab reinforcement for cases (a) and (b) in which the flange is in compression may be ignored, as its contribution to overall
moment capacity is fypically small. For case (c), tension slab reinforcement contributes significantly. By ignoring this contribution,
the beam capacity is underestimated, which is not always desirable. At Section A-4, the longitudinal bars in the compression zone
may be ignored as their contribution to flexural strength is not significant.
76
CVE 482 BMS
T BEAM CONSTRUCTION
a) For beams with a slab on both sides of the web (ACI 8.12.2)
Use the smaller of the following values:
(1) Effective width is L" 14 where Ln : clear span.
Cast-in-place (2) Effective overhanging flange width on each side of the web < 8 hr (h : slab
thickness) and one-half the clear distance to the next web.
(b) For beams with a slab on one side of the web (ACI8.12.3)
Use the smaller of the following values:
Effective overhanging flange width < 6 hr , one-half the clear distance to the next
web, and L" lI2.
NOTE: The above cases are.f'or.floor $stems where T beams are "extracted" -from the.floor system.
(c) For isolated T beams (ACI8.12.4)

Flange thickness > one-half the width of web Precast
Effective flange width < 4 b* where b*: web width
ACI 8.12.5 Where primary flexural reinforcement in a slab that is considered as T-beam flange
(excluding joist construction) is parallel to the beam, reinforcement perpendicular to the beam
has to be designed and detailed according to the following.
Design to carry factored load on the
overhanging part as a cantilever
I
I S -<1.5 slab thickness or 18"
(PerACI 8.12.5.2)
For isolated beams, consider the full width of overhanging flange, and for other T beams
consider only the effective overhanging slab width.
ACI 10.5.2 For statically determinate members with a flange in tension, the area Ar,,nn is
computed similar to rectangular sections but b* is replaced by the smaller of 2b* or the width of
the flange.
77
r
cvB
"^^,, V e BMS
t
482
r-
I
i CALCULATION OF EFFECTIVE FLANGE WIDTH
S lllustration of ACI 8.12.2 and 8.12.3 t
------ --l t----- - - - - -ri- - - - - -----rT
T
I
i
I
I
I
il
il
il
il
il (o
f- b e*w\5
il
il
il
il
il
ftr ]L il
G _r!_ _[ I
t-
il
il
lt
il
ll
il
il
il
T |.
il tl il /YYL0'l'l/\
il
il
il
t
il
il
il
il =
Yo
il il
il
il (.) .L. of columns
ll il il
& beams
il il
j il ll
{ fu-;r'br^l"t tr 4ln
il il il ll il
il il il ll ll
il il il il il (o
lt il il il il
A il
il
ll
il
il
il
il
il
il
ll AE
il il il il il
il il I /--uos"
9' 6@17'. 9
120'-0" Corner columns: 24" x 36"
Allother columns: 24" x24"
{ bqr^n Slab thickness: 5"
BEAM 1
r uf"
BEAM 2 Beamweb: 14"
Beam depth: 26"
- r-, Be{
T 26" r-l- !
Beff
T 14"1 F-at"-4t 130', l._ ,0'
!- u'-o' -t- 17'-0"
.,
sEcTloN-A ^ l'{ : Ah,l.' il"]^!,k,
Beam I 1" nY? (f Lt\ CrrV."r*n
Effective overhang: I \o ''
(L")ltz
6
:
hr:6(5:36"
(402-(36+12))l\2
. : 29.5" I
L h -- 17,tx-3fn-l'n
lZ(clear distance to the next web) : ll2(87) : 43.5"
I
Therefore, the effective overhang : 29 .5" , and the effective flange width : 29 .5" + 14" : 43 .5"
Beam 2 ./ ,\ur-\-J/ dtJr'r* ur*r,rll,!aa*

Effective width < (L^)14: (402-Ot4*lt+L gs.z"
Effective overhang on each side:
8 hr: 8(5 :49" : /
.'.Beff 40+14+40: 94"
ll2(clear distance to the left web) : ll2(87): 43 lyffit - l'{Y {\t)
'112(clear distance to the right web) : ll2(l :95"
Hence, B"n: 43.5* 14+95 152.5-r :
Therefore, the controlling effective width i
oi'*,, l, 1'l '
w,f og
78
cvE. 482 BMS
Minimum Reinforcement for T Beams
The underlying concept for minimum reinforcement for T beams is the same as that for
rectangular beams, i.e., a minimum amount of reinforcement is needed to ensure that the beam
does not behave as an unreinforced section. Based on equating the cracking moment of an
unreinforced T beam and flexural capacity of a T beam with minimum steel, the minimum area
of steel may be computed. For T beams with typical proportions that are bent such that the
flange is in compression, the minimumareaof steel is r..-.-

r,mrn-'''J!" b.d
,f whereb* is the
f,
width of the web. The basic derivation is similar to that for rectangular beams (see pages 42-43).
e .zrff '"
If the flange of a T beam is in tension, the minimum area of steel is A-
- .. = fx
Per ACI code $10.s.1, A*u,= max. of(+r"r)"rr(t"r) when the flange is in
compression for statically determinate or continuous (i.e., indeterminate) T beams, or when the
sr",w flange of continuous T beams is in tension. ACI $rc.5.2 states that for statically determinate T
beams with the flange is in tension, use the same equation but replace b.' by the smaller of 2b*
and width of the flange. Note that for the negative moment region of a continuous T beam
(which is essentially a rectangular section) the minimum steel should not be less than that for
positive bending sections, where the moment is generally less than that in the negative bending
sections.
Maximum Reinforcement for T Beams
The maximum amount of steel is obtained based on the same principles used to derive the
equation for A.,n,,u* for rectangular beams (see Chapter 3). That is, the maximum amount of steel
is obtained such that at " : 0.003 the value of rt: 0.004 (or, by setting cld:317 at e. :0.003).
A single general purpose equation cannot be obtained for T beams because the neutral axis may
be in the flange or in the web. The procedure for establishing Ar,*,u* is illustrated through the
following example.
48"
Example Calculate the
maximum amount of steel that can
be used for the shown T beam.
Assume l.:6,000 psi and Gr. 60
reinforcement.
16"
79
r CVE 482 BMS
r
f- 48"
t"*0.ilS3 *.$Sf' t
t-
{-
t-
20' d,
f- 26"
t- f" T
t*=0.004
-----+ -.>
t-
16" I
t-
0.003 0.004
c d -c
0.003 c
0.004 d,-c
0.003 c
0.004 20- c
L L_
(;) 20=8.57"
a:Brc : 0.75(8.57): 6.43"
L
@et:0.004 fr: fy .'.T:As,maxfi
L C:T
0. 85 fl + 0. 85f I 6x(6.43-5)) : A.,-u*fv
"(48x5) "(
L Therefore, Ar,-u* :22.35 in.2
L
80
L
CVE 482 BMS
ANALYSIS OF T BEAMS
Example The T-beam shown in the figure below was manufactured in a precast concrete yard
and shipped to a job site. Compute the nominal moment capacity and design moment capacity of
this isolated T beam. Assume f":4,000 psi and Grade 60 reinforcement.
l, 60' -l
t- =0.003 *.&*l', *.&51".
5u c ft
a
18
=6in' T-
lfa< tf a>
Where h' = flange thickness
Note: Depending on the depth of the stress block, tlte compressive rce may include part or the
entire.flange, as shown above.
ACI 8.12.4! < 4b.'l therefore, berr : 40" which will be used in the calculations. Note that
berr
even though the physical width of this isolated T beam is 60", only 40" of the flange is
considered to be effective and is used in the calculations.
Assume steel yields.

Check whether "a" (the depth of stress block) would be in the flange or web
T :A'f;:6(60):360 kips
Cnuns" : 0.85f . tr beff: 0.85(4X5X40) : 680 kips > T
Therefore, "a" has to be smaller than t, i.e., "a" is within the flange.
C:T
t"=0.003
0.85 f. a b.n:360 c
u: 0.85(4X40)
'uo =2.65"
Check assumption regarding yielding of steel
d,=18
c:a/Br : 2.651.85: 3.11"
r 0.003
:
; e' 0.01 15
(18-3.r2) 3.11
tr:60129000 : 0.0021
r>ty i hence, steel yields as assumed.
81
r CVE 482 BMS
r Check ACI limits on the amount of steel.

The flange is in compression; so calculation of Ar*n is similar to that for rectangular section by
using b* for b. Note that the equation was derived for rectangular sections, and it is strictly
t' speaking not applicable for T beams, but it is used per ACI.
t' trn'n
- max.or?J t" uo)
"t f,
) ",0('Puo\=
lf, )
r max. or[#,10 x r) ""'(ffirro x rsr) = 0.6 in2
I e, :0.0115 > 0.005; therefore, the provided amount of steel is adequate to ensure tension-
controlled failure mode. The same conclusion may be derived by comparitrg Ar,.* (as illustrated
r in the previous example).
M" : (d-al 2) : A.fy (d-al 2):3 60 (18'2.65 12) : 6,004 k-in.

r
T
The beam is tension-controlled; so 0:0.90.
Mn:0 M"-1J83-hin.
t
I
L
t,
82
t,
CVE 482 BMS
General Guidelines for Design of T Beams
1. Establish flange thickness according to the required flexural capacity of the floor slab, which
typically spans perpendicular between parallel T beams.
2. Choose web dimensions and overall depth according to the following requirements
(a) required negative flexural capacity at the supports, if the T beam is continuous;
(b) required shear capacity; and lor
(c) deflection requirements.
3. Determine the effective flange width according to ACI provisions.
4. With the available cross-sectional dimensions, compute a trial value of 4,. For this step, assume
that the depth of Whitney equivalent sfress block is less than slab thickness; so ordinary rectangular
beam design methods can be used. Furthefinore, assume that the beam is tension-controlled, i.e., Q
:0.90 and steel yields. Lastly, the equation of M" may be simplified as
Aft"t'
M, = cPA"f, d- = A"fr(O.9d)
r.7 f
"b
5. For the trial value of 4,, check the validity of assumption regarding the depth of Whitney
equivalent stress block and tension-controlled behavior of beam. If necessary, recompute A, by
considering the section as a T beam.
6. Check to ensure that Ar,,nin I A. and ACI 10.3.5 is met (i.e., q > 0.004). If necessary, revise the
secon.
Note: At this point, the students are not familiar with of reinforced concrete
shear design
members; therefore, design of T beams is limited to finding the required amount of
reinforcement for a given cross section. After Chapter 5, a general treatment of design of T
beams is possible.
83
r CYE 482 BMS
r DESIGN OF T BEAMS (Cast-in-place)

Example A T beam has been extracted from a floor s)stem. i.e.. assume that the flange width
shown meets the ACI effective flange width provisions of ACI 8.12. The beam overall
r dimensions are shown below. The beam is subjected to a factored positive moment of Mu :230
k-ft. Using f" : 3,000 psi and Grade 60 reinforcement, compute the required reinforcement.
Assume that the concrete mix has tA" maximum size aggregates, No. 4 stimrps will be used.
t-
60"
r
i
r- 5"
t
t
20"
12"
Since the T beam has been extracted from a floor, the given flange width is effective and is used
in the calculations.
Assume d=h-2.5":17.5"
At this point, we assume that the depth of Whitney equivalent stress block is less than 5" and
beam is tension-controlled. Furthermore, we simplify the equation for Mu so that we can quickly
calculate an area of steel to provide a capacity that is reasonably close to the target value.
Af
M,, = QA,f ,d_ '"; = QA"f,,(O.9d) (Assume a <5")
1.7 f
(230X12,000) : 0.9A,(60,000X0.9
"b xI7 .5); A" : 3.25 in2
A-ir=maX.Of ('JTuo ),,,(rygu o

x x
[ ) \f,
3.F0oo
I
L- max. of (12x r7.s)J rz sl) =0.7
60,000 ""a(ffirrzx in2
!
ir
L-
84
i-
CVE 482 BMS
The calculated value of A, exceeds Ar,.nn; hence, use A, :3.25 in2
Provide 3 No. 10 bars in one layer with A. : 3.81 in2. In a I2-in wide beam, 3 No. l0 can fit,
and a minimum of 2 No. l0 bars have to be provided. Therefore, 3 No. 10 bars meet the
requirements on maximum and minimum number of bars.
Check the capaci8 with the selected number and size of bars
d:20 -(1.5" + Il2"+1.27"l2:16.2"

Note: 1.5" is cover, ll2" is diameter of No. 4 stimrps, and,1.27"12 is the radius of No. 10 bars
Assume beam is tension-controlled; so steel yields
Is "a" in the flange or web?

1 :A'&: 3.81(60) :229 kips
Cnuns":0.85fl. hiberi= 0.85(3X5X60):765 kips > T
Therefore, "a" has to be smaller than hr (5"), i.e.,,,a" is within the flange
C:T
0.85 f. a b.: A.!
a- ' '
3.81160.000)
' =1.49"
0.85(3,000x60)
Check assumption regarding yielding of steel
c:alr: 1.4910.85 : I.76"
, _ 0.003
(16.2-1.76) r.76' er: 0.0246>0.005 .'.Tensioncontrolled
er: 60129000 : 0.0021
s>ty I hence, steel yields as assumed. Moreover, beam is tension-controlled and has adequate
ductility.
Mn : T(d-al2): A"f, (d-al2):3.81(60) (16.2-1.4912): 3533 k-in.
Beam is tension-controlled; so 0:0.90.
Mu:0 Mn:0.9(3533):3180 k-in.: 265k-ft, which is I5%o larger than the target moment
capacity of 230 k-ft. One may use smaller bars to lower the level of over strength. If 3 No. 9
bars were used, Mu : 227 k-ft, which is 1.3% less than the target value. Since the beam
dimensions are fixed, other options for trying to match the target capacity and available capacity
are not feasible. Therefore, I5o/o over strength is accepted and 3 No. 10 bars are used.
85
r cvE 482 BMS
r 60"
t-
t' 5"
r 20"
No. 4 Stirrups
t- 3 No. 10
t-
12
t-
t
L
L
86
t
CVE 482 BMS
Moment Envelope
When considering the gravity loads typically working on a floor slab, the dead loads can
reasonably be taken to act on the entire lengths of the spans because a significantly large portion
of dead load is the selweight of the member being considered. However, the locations of live
loads are less certain. For example, imagine a college classroom building: in one case, every
other classroom is empty and the others are occupied to capacity and in another case, all of the
classrooms are occupied to capacity. Each case will result in a different moment distribution on
the beams supporting the slab. As such, a designer investigates several different configurations
of live loads to determine the case where the maximum moments (positive and negative
moments) occur to ensure that the capacity is not exceeded. Designers can quickly determine the
arangement of the live load that causes the maximum moment demands based on the concept of
influence lines. Moreover, it is important to establish the theoretical locations at which the top
and bottom steel can be terminated. One method for this purpose is to establish the moment
envelope. For this purpose, various moment diagrams corresponding to various locations of live
loads are generated and plotted in the same moment diagram. Through superposition of the
moment diagrams, the moment envelope is found. The moment envelope will provide the
information to establish the maximum positive and negative moments, and the theoretical
locations at which the bottom and top bars can be terminated to ensure that there will always be
reinforcement, in the bottom and top of the beam, to resist all possible load cases. This concept
is illustrated through the following example.
The beam shown below resists its self-wei ght: 0.415 k/ft, service level dead load (DL) :
1.5 Wft, and service level live load (LL) : 3.5 k/ft. The live load is assumed to entirely cover
any of the spans or both. Three load cases were considered: (a) LL is on both spans, (b) LL is on
the 24-ft long span, and (c) LL is on the overhang.
87
r cvE 482 BMS
r .6LL = 1.6*3.5 t,
1 .2DL=1 .2* (1 .s+0.42 Sl
"
. 31
I T J-
r J J JJ Case (a)
12'
t' -1\.-trb
2ts,l1
.6LL = 1.6.3.5
1 .2DL= 1 .2* (1 .5+ 0. 47 5)
f-
tir
TJI Case (b)
l-
qrlr I tlr.tt
f-
6LL = 1.6"3.5
1 .2DL= 1 .2* (1 .5+ 0.47 5)
t-
t Case (c)
I I {.s3 I rc7,11
For each cas, the moment diagrams were generated and plotted as shown below.
t
600
400
#
-W*
-M % *%*
-Load Case a
-@* Load Case b
Load Case c
_rd!EGk-
-
t 200
ffi
#--E#
@"d- %_ q*
@"* Extent of bottom
.g 0
# % W W,/
&,Y
steel
L co k&
kb d#t"
E / @l r
o -200
Extent of Top steel
L -400
\ {
t -600
-800
0612'r8243036
l.. Distance (fr)
It is clear that the maximum positive moment that this beam is governed by case (b), and the
t
88
U
cv 482 BMS
negative moment is governed by either case (a) or case (c). Since the beam will most likely have
the same overall dimensions in both spans, the largest absolute value, in this case the negative
moment, is used to size the member and required top steel to resist the negative moment. Having
established the overall beam dimensions, adequate bottom bars are provided to resist the
maximum positive moment. The moment envelope is shown below.
600
','\.) ,.
400
200 {,y'"-
d" Extent of bottom steel
tl 0
f
co

o -200
Extent of Top steel
-400
-600
-800
0 6 12 18 24 30 36
Distance (ft)
The bottom and top bars need to be extended, at least theoretically, as shown in the moment
diagrams or moment envelope. The overall layout of the beam, with the theoretical cut-off
points, is shown below.
3.8228',
1z',
22.2158',
For more complex structures, moment enveloping typically takes time and other simpler methods
are needed at least for preliminary designs. The ACI Building Code 318-08 provides a set of
coefficients that can be used to establish the maximum values of moments and shears.
89
'-_
CVE 482 BMS
ACr MOMENT COEFFTCIENTS (ACr $8.33)

Instead of frame analysis, ACI provides approximate values of moments and shears for
design purposes. The approximation is permitted for continuous beams and one-way slabs so long
as the following conditions are satisfied:
(l) there are two or more spans;
(2) spans are equal, or the difference between two adjacent spans is not more than207o;
(3) loads are uniformly distributed; 'l'h es e rx'e unf
(4) *t'l*r'cr
unit live load does not exceed three unit dead load; and
lesd ottd tirc lsrts.
(5) members are prismatic.
Moment = (wo L2, ); where wu = factored load per unit length of beam or per unit area of slab; L,
= clear span for positive moment and average of adjacent clear spans for negative moment; and cx =
moment coefficient as summarized below.
Moment Coefficients (a
Case O
Positive moment in end spans where the discontinuous end is unrestrained utt
Positive moment in end spans where the discontinuous end is integral with |14
support
Positive moment in interior spans ln6

Negative moment at exterior face of first interior support in a structure with two y9
spans
Negative moment at exterior face of first interior support in a structure with more 1110
than two spans
Negative moment at other faces of interior supports ult

Negative moment at face of all supports for slabs with spans less than 10 ft., and
for beams where sum of column flexural stiffnesses to beam flexural stiffness U12
exceeds 8 at each end ofspan
Negative moment at interior face of exterior support where the member is built 1124
integrally with a spandrel beam
Negative moment at interior face of exterior support where the member is built Ut6
integrally with a column
Shear = T (rv, L" ); where Y = shear coefficient obtained from the following table; w, = factored
load per unit length of beam or per unit area of slab; and Ln = clear span
Shear Coefficients
Case
t
Shear in end members atface of first interior support 0.575
Shear at face of all other support U2
90
cvB 482 BMS
_=(w,L ffi-= 1w"L"2l11

^r110 ful-= (w,L"2)/16
Tributa ry butary
fi
1g+=(w,L^r)t16
M+=(wuL^,)114
ffi+=(w,Ln 't1+ M+ (W 16
Note: The load per unit area (W") is multiplied by ibutary width to obtain the load per unit length
of beams (w"). Tributary width is typically taken as the distance between the center lines of the
adjacent spans, as shown above. For instance, the loads per unit length (w") of the interior and
exterior beams in the N-S direction are found by multiplying V/" by the appropriate tributary widths
shorvn in the figure.
The following example illustrates what values of l, to use are as follows (refer to the figure
below).
o maximum positive moment in the left span: ln= 1,,,
o maximum positive moment in the middle span: l,= 1,,,
o maximum negative moment at the left supportt l, = I,,t
o maximum negative moment at the first interior support from the left: t-=1"* \
2
91
l'-
cv 482 BMS
t-
/,r,1 ln,z ln,3
A A
ta Tribu widrh
for Beam I Eeam
n,t,: Slw"ll vt u: S1u,,ll trrt u: fi1x,,,/l
,,: -$1n',,/fi ,,: -t(wuln2) tr ,,: -t(lu,, /1)

t,,
Mu: -$(w,,/ -(r"l)

":
92
t'
cvB 482 BMS
r
I
t-
t-
t-
t-
t Chapter 5
One V/ay Slabs

I
t_
t
L 93
t
CVE 482 BMS
The floor plan of a slab is shown below
Ir L" -t
-l M&r^
\
rnrffit&
upp orts rwunmYffiwry3wm
Lo
12"
- (---r----
A representative
strip temperature/
shrinkage
reinforcement
lf L',1L"2 2, most of the load ip caryed in the
-short
direction to the supporting beams or
suPpgtts. 'l his lype of slab is called "one-way slab" as the loads are carried predominately in one
direction. Therefore, curvatures and moments are the same in all strips in the short direction.
Each strip can be viewed as a beam with span Lu and depth equal to the slab thickness. Note that
this simplified method ignores Poisson's effect. In reality, flexural compression in the concrete
in direction Lu results in lateral expansion in direction L6 unless the compressed concrete is
restrained. In one-way slabs, this lateral expansion is resisted by adjacent slab strips, which tend
to expand also. The slight strengthening and stiffening of the slab in the short direction can be
ignored. The primary (main) flexural steel and temperature/shrinkage steel are placed as shown
above.
For design, we typically assume that the strips are 12" wide. The required reinforcement
is calculated exactly similar to the procedures discussed already for beams. The reinforcement
will be the amount required per ft. (12"), and will be repeated throughout the length L6. Another
example is provided in the following to further illustrate this concept.
94
t-
r CVE 482 BMS

It It It
: T-
Temperature
-S Dircction and Shrinkage
of Span Steel
- Area of
One-Way 12" 12"
Slab Strip
\
Flexural
-S Reinf.
:
--
tu"t t
T&S Reinf. ^^"!"
', ...fr''k' ,t --"ryJ-*r
*1":ct T & S Reinf.
Flexural
T2"
Reinf.
Flexural
Reinf. Section A-A Section B-B
Assr"uning that the slabs are simply supported between the supports.
Although the design procedure is similar to that for beams, a number of the detailing
requirements are different as discussed next.
DESIGN OF ONE-\ryAY SLABS
1. Select the necessary minimum slab thickness from ACI Table 9.5(a), which is summarized
below.
MINIMUM THICKNESS UNLESS DEFLECTIONS ARE COMPUTED
Simply One end Both ends Cantilever

supported continuous continuous
Ll20 Ll24 Ll28 LILO
95
cvE 482 BMS
Notes
L: span in inches (which is typically taken as center-to-center spacing of supports)
The tabulated values assume normal weight concrete and Grade 60 reinforcement. For
lightweight concrete (W.:90 to 115 pcf), multiply the tabulated values by (1.65-
0.005V/.) >1.09 where 'W. is in pcf. If fy >60,000 psi, multiply the values by
(0.4+&/100,000).
Round h to the next higher '/o" for h < 6" if the calculated value is not multiples of t/".
Round h to the next higher t/r" for h > 6" if the calculated value is not multiples of t/2" .
2. Based on a trial slab thickness, calculate the selweight and compute the maximum moment
per ft. of slab width.
3. Estimate d = h-1. ( t7,-^ *q @

4, Assume slab is tension-controlled, i.e., 0: 0.90 and steel yields.
A,f,
5. Use M,,=QA,.f,, a- \.7f"b)) = QA,f,,(0.9d)to calculate an approximate value of 4,. Note
that in this equatio,b: t2"
6. Check A, from step 5 against Asmin, which is controlled by temperature and shrinkage
reinforcement, i.e., As-in: (p,".p)bh, where
t' is
ptemp: (Area of temperature and shrinkage reinforcement) / (Gross concrete area of slab),
\ twt b : 12", and h : slab thickness.
Case 0t"*t
Slabs with Grade 40 or 50 deformed bars 0.0020
Slabs with Grade 60 deformed bars or welded fabric (plain or 0.0018

deformed)
Slabs with reinforcement with & > 60,000 psi measured at er: 0.0035 (0.0018 x 60,000)/f,
Note that ptemp cnrot be less than 0.0014
7. Select primary reinforcement and bar spacing so that A, in 12" will at least be equal to the
larger of A.,,nn and A. from step 5.
., {i,,i alJak
According to ACI 7.6.5, the primary flexural reinforcement cannot be placed farther apart
k than three times the slab thickness nor 18 inches Although not required by ACI, bar size
ybese
times slab thickness.
is not less than 1.5
for fabrication and
;dliirglr$-runt of reinforcing bars. It is best to keep the.:fu.ing above 6 inches
96
I
cvB 482 BMS
r- Aft":' :
8. Check the capacity from M,, = QA,f ,, d - , in which b tTo'. As part of this step,
r.7 f
t- ensure that ACI 10.3.5 is met (i.e., e1 > 0.004), "b
and preferably ensure that the slab is tension-
controlled. If the beam does not meet ACI 10.3.5, the slab thickness needs to be increased.
t- 9. Select temperature and shrinkage reinforcement. n

ILn"qyL Lm/>4
l'- According to ACI 7.12.2.2, the temperature and shrinkage reinforcement cannot be
farther than five nor 18 inches. The reinforcing bars have
v
I
the slab
to anchored to not ACI, select the SO
that the actual is not less than 1.5 thickness

t-
DESIGN OF ONE.\AY SLABS

t
Example I An underground tunnel is constructed with two reinforced concrete walls and slab. The
slab has to carry selweight and imposed live load equal to 150 psf. The slab-wall connections are
assumed to be non-moment resisting, i.e., simple connections. Use f. : 3,000 psi and Grade 60
reinforcement. Design the slab, i.e., compute the required slab thickness and reinforcement. Sketch
your design.
h'"in (ACI Table 9.5a: Ll20 : (l0xl2)120 : 6" l2 t,

DL : 150(6112:75 psf
SLAB
Take a 12" strip; so the loads will be
Vy'oL : 75 (1') :75lblft

Vy'LL : 150 (1 ') : 150 lb/ft
r, _ (1.ZWDL+l.6Wrr)E _
rvlmax - -g
t Irr.zxzsl + (r.6X1 5o)]{ro' ) : 4,125 lb-ft : 49.5 k-in. l- 10' -l

-l
t 8
I
Assume cover :t/o"i hence d = h-1 :5"
49.5 = QA,fy(0.gd):0.94,(60)(0.9x5); A, : 0.204 in.2 (controls)
Asmin : Pt..p bh:0.0018(1 2)(6):0.13 in2
Therefore, A, :0.204 in2 needs to be provided.
97
L
CV,482 BMS
Recommended s,-nn (minimum spacing of bars): 1.5h: 9"
Required sn'u* (maximum spacing of bars) per ACI 7 .6.5 : smaller of 3h:3x6":18" and 18"; s*u*
:18"
If use No. 3 bars s : (0. U0.204)xI2 : 6.48"

1
If use No. 4 bars s : (0.2010.204)xl2: 11.8" say 11"

If use No. 5 bars s: (0.31/0.204)x12: 18.3" ) s,nu* N.G.
Therefore, provide No. 4 bars @ 11" o.c. to reduce the number of bars.
Check ACI 10.3.5 and moment capacity
d:6-(314+0.512):5"
A. in a l2-inch strip: (l2lll)x}.20:0.22 in.2
A.fi = 0.85 f" ab; 0.22 (60):0.85(3)a(12); a:0.431"
c:al c:0.431/0.85 :0.507"
0.003 t, 0.003 eI
c =d-c' 0.507 5 - 0.507'
e,=0.0266>0.005
Therefore, not only does the slab meet ACI 10.3.5, but also it is tension-controlled.
r
Af
s/t'
: - 60rc.22\ 1
:56.4 k-in.
M,, = QA,f ,, cl- 0.9(0.22X60) 5- |
r.7 f '"b 1.7(3X12)l
This value of provided moment capacity is I4Yo larger than the M equied : 49.5 k-in. However,
we cannot reduce the capacity, as we are constrained to the minimum depth of 6", and to the
spacing limitations of the bars. Therefore, we accept this design.
Temperature and shrinkage steel
A. = (0.0018)bh:0.0013(12)(6) = 0.13 in2
If : (0.11/0.13) xl2: t}.l'

use No. 3 bars, s
lf use No. 4 bars, s: (0.2010.13) 18.5">18" .'.Use 18"
Note that the use of No. 4 is more
"tZ:
desirable as the primary and temperature/shrinkage bars sizes
will become the same.
Recommended smin : 1.5h : 9"
Required smax : smaller of 5h: 5x6 : 30" and 18" per ACI7.12.2.2
Therefore, provide No. 4 bars at 18" o.c. as temperature and shrinkage reinforcement
98
r
cvB 482 BMS
r
No. 4 18" o.c. (Temperature & Shrinkage)
t-
o
^ll
I 314" caver to No. 4 bars

r-
I o. 4 @ 11" a.c. (Typical Primary Bars)
Example 2 A concrete slab cantilevered from the exterior face of a reinforced concrete building
I is shown in the figure below. In addition to its own self-weight, the balcony has superimposed
service dead loads and live loads of I0 psf and 50 pst respectively. If the compressive strength
of the concrete (f ,) is 4,000 psi and Gr. 60 steel is used, determine the amount of reinforcing
steel needed for the slab for flexure and fr temperature and shrinkage. Draw a sketch of the final
design and clearly indicate the size and spacing of the reinforcement in both directions, the slab
thickness, and the depth of the longitudinal steel.
,1,
,1,
,1,
,1,
Consider
Fixed
I
l0'-0"
I
i-
I
I
I
t_
I
I
t- 99
cvB 482 BMS
From TABLE 9.5(a)

.
h 7
L ll0112"/') l"lll
m'|n 10 =
10
Calculate the self-weight of a 12" strip of the balconl,

(}'ts kcf)1r2")\12")
str' = = 0.r5k / fr
l44in' I fr'
Calculate the service from the and live on a 12" of the

balcon)
(I0psf)(12")
DL=
lkip)(l2'l') =0.01k ft
I
(1000/
(s0psf)(12")
LL= 0.05k I ft
(1000/ I kip)(12"1') =
2"
w=I.2wor+1.6w*
w =1.2(0.15 + 0.01) + 1.6(0.05)
w=0.272k / ft
Calculate the maximum applied moment, Mu
M,2 _ wt2 _ (o.2i2k I ft)(roft),

2
M,, =r3'6k - ft
Assume that the cover is'/o" . Therefore, d: 12" - t/o,, : lly4- .
QM,= M,,
QA,f ,,(0.9d = (l3.6kip - rt)Q2" I ') = 163.2kip - in

(0.9){ (60stx0.9xl 1.25") = 163.2kip - in Note that
,4 _ l63.2kip-in A" = P,"nobh = (0.00 I sxl 2")(12") = 0.259in2
" (0.9x60kstx0.9X11.25"\ A" = 0.259in2

A, = o.299in' Therefore, Ar:0.299 in2 needs to be
provided.
Select bar size and spacing
Recommended Spacingt smin : l.5h : (1.5X12") : 18,'
100
t-
CVE 482 BMS
t- : 3h=(3)(12")=36"
Required Spacing: s.nax smaller of
18"
I For#4bars: s =(
o''o'n' -,rr"r=8.04"
\0.2985in" )
t-
For#5 bars: s =(
o'lt"'
-,tr", =12.46"
\0.2985in' )
I
I
For#6bars: s =(
o'oo'" -l,rr",
=17.69"
r-
10.2985in' )'
I Use #6 bars spaced at t7"o.c.
I
Note that this spacing is larger than the recommended spacing Smin:l8". However, to satisfy the
recommended minimum spacing and the required maximum spacing, the spacing would have to
be exactly 18". Since this cannot be achieved, the required spacing limitations control.
Check moment capacitv (and ductility)

o'75"
The effective depth of the slab is d =12"- 0.75"+ = 10.9"
2
The area of steel provided in a 12" strip is I (0.44n2) = 0.3lIin2
/a-11
=
ti)
1,,-t
(0. S 5)(4ksi )(12") a = (0. 3 1 Un\(60 l<si)
(0.3Lun\(60ksi)
u- = 0.4574"
(0.8s)(aksix12")
c -0'4574" = 0.538"
0.85
c o'538" Tension- controlled
d,- 10.9"
=0.0494 <0.375
Q=0.9
0.4574"
I
Q M,, =(o.exo.3 1 un\(6o/rjil o.e"
I 2
[r
I
Q M,, = l79.2tkip - in = l4.93kip - ft
i
QM,,=l4.93kip- rt> M,=13.6kip- ft OK
.-
Note that the slab is100%-lgl
14.e3J
rcrJ%=8.9o/oover designed. However, since the minimum
I
[
govemed by minimum thickness of TABLE 9.5(a) and the spacing is
t-
I
height of the slab is
governed by ACI provisions. The final beam design is accepted.
f
L- 101
L
cvB 482 BMS
Design temperature and shrinkage (T & S) steel
A" = P,o,,,ubh = (0.00 1 8) (12")(12") = 0.259 in2
A. =0.259in2
Recommended Spacingi smin: 1.5h (1.5X12") = 18"
: 5h=(5)(I2")=60"
Required Spacing: smax smaller of I
I 18"
0.20in2
For#4burr, (12") = 9.27"
"=[ r25gt,;
0 --) lin2
For #5 uu^, = (12") = 14.36"
" [ 0.259in2
0.44in2
For #6 bars:
"
= (12") = 20.39') S.,* = 18" NG
[ 0.2sst#
Use #5 bars at l{"o.c. for T & S steel.
Note that when possible, use the same size bars or both the flexural and T&S steel. tt is more
economical and the probability of the bars being placed improperly is lower. In this case it is not
feasible.
Sketch of the final design

aWffiffiM$ffi
Trans. Steel
J
Long. Steel .4"' .,,
'#6@17" a.c.
@, @ M M WW ffii&dW ffi ffi ffi m #& ffi W W w rtr W @

#^&
&
d Trans. Steel
#5 l4"o.c.
c'l
Long. Steel
#6@17"o.c.
10'-0"
r02
t-
cvB 482 BMS
I For continuous one-way slabs, where the primary bars are in the top and bottom, place the
temperature/shrinkage bars next to the primary bars. Therefore, the temperature/shrinkage bars
are also in the top and bottom. An example is illustrated next.
t-
Example 3 Compute the required spacing of temperature steel for the one-way slab shown
below. Use Gr.50 steel andNo. 4bars.
t-
A': 0.0024r: 0.002(8X12) :0.192 ln
t- :
l Use No. 4 bars at 12" on center, which will 0.2 in2. Alternate these bars on the top
and bottom as shown below.
No (rYP.)
12',(TYP.)
Flange thickness = 8"
t-
I
L
I
I
I
t- 103
I
L
r
cvE 482 BMS
r
r
r
r
tr
l-
t Chapter 6
Shear
t
l-
t
t r04
U
cvE,482 BMS
Diagonal Tension in Homogenous Elastic Beams A simply-supported beam is shown below.
I I I I I I I I
--Etr
o=v
G-V of 62
<l-- V <V
\
v t
f_r
V 1 <____J__ 2
V
------------->
V V
\0\
Stresses @ Principal Stresses Stresses @ Principal Stresses
location 1 @ location 1 location 2 @ location 2
Figure l. Stresses in Beams
Based on elastic theory, the values of flexural stress (f) and shear stress (v) are calculated from
Eq. l.
MY
o=f=
I (l)
VQ
It
Knowing the stresses at each location (e.g., for elements I and 2), the principal stresses and their
direction are known, i.e.
6.^=o
l, =l*
max,mtn
"f'1 +v'
2 4 (2)
2v
tan2 e
f
Considering that the values of f and v vary depending on the location along the beam and depth,
the angle defrning the principal planes varies. Note that f and v depend on the value of bending
moment (M) and shear force (V). Stress trajectories are obtained if the principal stresses are
plotted along the beam, as shown below.
-z -'\
Tension Trajectories
Traj ectories
Figure, il;;,.?J'TPttssion
105
CVE 482 BMS
Tension stress trajectories of various inclinations and magnitudes can impair the integrity
of the beam if it does not have adequate tensile strength. These stresses are called "diagonal
tension". The beam can crack perpendicular to the tension trajectories. This discussion can
generally explain the crack pattems for reinforced concrete members; however, the stresses as
computed from Eq. I are not applicable for reinforced concrete members as concrete is not
elastic homogenous.
Web-sheor crock lexurol crock
Web- sheor crocking
Flexure-shear Flexurol crocks

crock
Flexure-sheor crocking
Figure 3. Diagonal Tension Cracking in Reinforced Concrete Beams
lf flexural stresses are small, diagonal tension stresses are inclined at about 45 degrees,
and numerically equal to shear stress with a maximum at the neutral axis. Hence, diagonal
cracks form mostly at or near the neutral axis and propogate from that location, as shown in
Figure 3. When the values of both v and f are large, the situtation is different. For such cases, in
a well-proportioned and reinforced beam, flexural cracks form first. Their width and length are
well controlled and kept small by the presence of longitudinal steel. However, when the
diagonal tension stresses at the upper end of one or more of these crackes exceed the tensile
strength of the concrete, the cracks bends in a diagonal direction and continue to grow in width
and length. These cracks are known as flexure-shear cracks, and are more common than web-
shear cracks. Web-shear cracks form when diagonal tension stresses near the neutral axis is
almost equal to tension strength of the concrete. Diagonal tension cracks form when the nominal
shear stress, i.e., v".: V"./bd is 3.5r/fl.. Web-shear cracking is relatively rare and occurs mainly
near supports of deep, thin-webbed beams or at inflection points of continuous beams.
When a diagonal tension crack forms, the area of concrete resisting shear drops and shear
stress is larger than v : V/bd. The amount of reduction in shear area varies, as it depends on the
unpredictable length of the preexisting flexural tension cracks. In addition, the combination of
flexural stress ( and shear stress (v) increases on,ax . No method has been found to predict the
r06
CV,482 BMS
diagonal tension stresses under these conditions. Based on experimental data, the nominal shear
stress at which diagonal tension cracks form and propogate is v..: V.r/bd:1.9{fl.. tn
comparison with v". : 3.5r/f . , it is clear that large bending moments can reduce the shear force
at which diagonal cracks form to roughly one half of the value at which they would if the
moment is zero. Therefore, shear at which diagonal cracks develop depends on the ratio of shear
to moment (V/M) or the ratio of shear stress to flexural stress (vlf) at the top of the flexural
cracks. Note that
u= f, (I)
'bd Kr depends on the depth of penetration of flexural cracks, and geometry
f = I ,
# ,
I depends on crack propogation, and geometry
r4(h/2)-
Note: For example, for a rectangular section: f = ry =
I Ur2bh,
= ry
bh'
Therefore,
:f =:+
ICM
affects the load at which flexural cracks develop into flexure - shear cracks
Based on the experimental results shown in Figure 4, Equation 3 has been proposed to calcualte
the shear stress at which diagonal cracks form. In this figure, v.,- is shear stress at which diagonal
cracks form.
5.0

a
4.0 . ro
a. . a t.
tat ?--
()- , aaa
a
3.0 t' . '
. \ vd'l-rt =[ s+ z5oo pvaaufrl,]=r.u
='l\"
ls 2.O
rl
vrrl,/-l/ =2.g
,ol\,*
1.0
lnvcrsc rcole
0 O.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 l0 1.52.0 5

1OO0 PVd
w,l-r
Figure 4. Comparison of Eq. 3 Against Experimental Data
t07
cvB 482 BMS
V",
Vcr
bd
l.e.+2soo# <3.5Jfl. (all in psi units)
where D = ""
^-
'bd
A, = Area of longitudinal bars for bending moment (3)
V = shear at section
M = moment at section
Note that as p incerases, V". (i.e., shear at which diagonal cracks develop) increases. This trend
is logical because larger amounts of longitudinal steel result in smaller and narrower flexural
tension cracks prior to formation of diagonal cracks, leaving a larger area of concrete available to
resist shear.
Behavior of Diagonally Cracked Beams
Flexural tension cracks are harmless only because adequate longitudinal reinforcement
has been provided to resist the flexural
P
( oncrete
tension stresses that the cracked concrete is Crushing
no longer able to resist. Flexural "failure " is

I
attributed to yielding of longitudinal steel -l I \
and/or crushing of concrete, as shown in
Figure 5. Beams with shear span/depth (a/d) a = Shear Span
ratio of more than 7 typically fail in a
flexural mode. For beams with smaller a
P P
values of ald, failure is due to shear as

exaplined below. For beams with 3 <ald <7,
a diagonal tension failure leads to failure. "l_
-t
The diagonal crack, once formed, spreads
either immediately or at only slightly higher Reinl. Steel
load. It traverses the entire beam from the Fails in Tension
tension reinforcement to the compression (a) Flexural Failure

face, and splits the beam into two. The P P
beam, then, fails. This process is sudden and
without warning. Complete absence of shear
reinforcement would make reinforced _t
I
concrete beams very wlnerable to accidental I
large overloads which would result in a Diagonal Tension

Failure
catastrophic failure.
(b) Diagonal Tension Failure
For deeper beams, the diagonal crack,
once formed, spreads towards and partially rlgure 5. Failure Mode of Slender Beams
into the compression zone but stops short of
penetrating to the compression face. In such cases, no sudden collapse occurs, and the failure
load may be significantly higher than that at which the diagonal crack is first formed. Depending
108
cvE. 482 BMS
on the value of ald, the mode of failure is different. For short beams (i.e., those with a/d between
I to about 2.5), the beam fails either in shear-tension failure mode or in shear-compression mode
as shown in Figure 6. Shear-tension failure occurs when secondary cracks propogae into the
support, and the bars lose their bond. This mode is called shear-tension failure because the
failure is initiated by the loss of the tension reinforcement. If the tension reinforcement is
adequately anchored, a second mechanism takes over. Shear-compression failure occurs when
the concrete in the compression region crushes; hence the name shear-compression. Shear-
compression failure occurs at loads higher than those causing shear-tension failure.
P
lnsufficient
"[ Anchorage
Loss ofbond
due 1o crack forming
along longitudinalbar
not adequately anchored
(a) Shear-Tension Failure
P
Concrete
Crushes
I Adequately
anchored
\' Adequate
Anchorage
tension steel
(b) Shear-Compresson Failure

ald=1to2.5
Figure 6. Shear Failures in Short Beams
For deep beams (i.e., those with a/d less than 1), the resistance is provided by a tied arch
in which the tension reinforcement forms the tension tie, and compression struts in the web and
compression fiber in the top form the rest of the arch. If any of the components of the tied arch
fails, the beam fails. The failure may be due to loss of anchorage of the tension bars (i.e., loss of
109
I
cvE 482 BMS
t- tension tie in the tied arch). Bearing failure also leads to loss of anchorage. Crushing of
compresslon concrete andlor web also leads to failure as the arch is lost
Compression
P P Stnrts in P
t- Concrete
/
Type of Failure
t- L
.\(. 1. Anchorage Failure
r
I
\:
\,
2. Bearing Failure
3. Flexural Failure
4. Arch-Rib Failure
5. Arch-Rib Failure
r- Tension reinforcenrent Flexural failure rs due to yielding of
acts s a tension tie bars and/or crushing of cancrete.
ald= 0to 1
Figure 7. Failure Modes of Deep Beams
'Without
Behavior of Reinforced Concrete Beams Shear Reinforcement The free-body diagram
of a diagonally cracked reinforced concrete beam is shown in Figure 8.
X
+ +l
I
P
Vcz
c
v
-Y- ut
.@-
--T
Splitting forces V I z
f Vry
t
t-rl I _ _+_
I T I
t,
Vd I
rP
I
I
l<
t R
la*-- Xa
I
'l
Figure 8. Forces at a Diagonal Crack in a Beam Without Shear Reinforcement
I
L Three basic mechanisms provide the resistance: (a) dowel action, V, IS the diagonal crack tries
to pass through the longitudinal bar; (b) shear resistance provided by the uncracked concrete,
L. 110
L
cvE 482 BMS
V.,; and (c) the vertical component of aggregate interlock, V;y, which is due to friction between
the sides of the cracked section. Therefore, Vtotot : Va * V., * V, which balances the applied
shear, which for the example shown in Figure 8 is R-Pr. Note that Vtotal iS the shear capacity of
the beam (V..). The ACI Building Code does not provide explicit equations for each component,
i.e. the value of V". is computed by Eq. 3 described previously.
The reinforcing bars on which the dowel force (V) acts are supported against vertical
displacement mainly by the thin concrete layer below. The bearing pressure caused by V
creates, in the concrete, vertical splitting tensile forces shown in Figure 8. Because of these
forces, diagonal cracks often result in splitting of the concrete along the reinforcing bar. The
resulting crack reduces V. Therefore, contribution of V is usually small. The contribution of
aggregate interlock (Viy) is about ll3 of the total resistance. Note that as the diagonal cracks
become wider the level of V; becomes smaller. Failure occurs when all the internal resisting
mechanisms are exhausted.
A few points can be seen by looking at the equations of equilibrium of the free-body
diagram shown in Figure 8.
M intemal atpoinra : V P - Vi mi in which T6 : force in bar at point "b" and m :

Ta Z+
moment arm of force Viwith respect to point a. Since the intemal and external moments have to
be equal, M sxlglatpointa : Ta Z+ V6 P - Vi m.
Therefore, T: (M extemalatpointu - V P +Yim)lZ
Note that if we had neglected the effects of diagonal shear, Tr : (M extematat pointa)lZ
Hence, the formation of the diagonal cracks results in the following redistribution of internal
forces and stresses.
At section o'", v avg. before cracking : V"*1./bd. After cracking the shear force is resisted by
the dowel action, aggregate interlock, and shear force on the much smaller area by the
remaining uncracked concrete. As tension splitting develops along the longitudinal bars,
V6 and V decrease, which will put a larger demand on the remaining uncracked concrete
afea-
2. Diagonal cracks rise above the neutral axis before getting arrested by the compression
stresses. The compressive force, C, will act on a smaller compression area, and hence the
compression stresses in the remaining uncracked concrete is increased.
3. Prior to diagonal cracking, T : (M extemal at point b)/2.

After diagonal cracking, Tr: (M extemaratpointa - V P + Yim)lZ, i.e., it depends on the
moment applied at section "a" which is larger than the moment at point "b".
It is desirable to develop the full moment capacity of the beam rather than having the
strength limited by premature shear failure as shear failure is very brittle and occurs without
warning. If a large safety margin relative to the available shear strength (v..: 1.9r/1. + 2500
111
r
CVE 482 BMS
t- (pVd)/M < 3.5{f") does not exist, special reinforcement, known, as web, transverse, or shear
reinforcement is needed to increase the shear strength. Note that in this equation, 1.9{f"
accounts for shear strength of uncracked concrete, and term (pVd)/M, in which p:A,/bd,
t- accounts for dowel action.
Tvpes of Web Reinforcement

t-
A number of possible types of shear reinforcement are shown in Figure 9. The most
I common types are vertical stimrps, which are typically #3,#4, or #5. Stimrps larger than # 5 do
not fit within beams of reasonable sizes. Stimrps may be open or closed, and may have several
"legs". It is also possible to reinforce the web by bending up a part of the longitudinal steel
t- where it is no longer needed to resist flexural tension. Bent-up bars are not that common due to
fabrication and field installation problems. Typically, if bent-up bars are used, they will be
counted to increase the diagonal tension failure.
t
I I I t
I
I
I
I
lttt
It
E
I t I
--,-l--L- J I
Possible stirrup layouts
Bent-up
longitudinal bars
Figure 9. Common Types of Web Reinforcement
I
I
L- Behavior of Beams with'Web Reinforcement
I
I
Web steel has no noticeable effect prior to the formation of diagonal cracks. Hence, the
L magnitude of shear force or stress that causes cracking to occur will be essentially the same as in
a beam without web steel. After cracking, the following observations can be made.
I
l_. Lt2
f
I
L
cvE 482 BMS
1. Part of the applied shear is resisted by web reinforcement.
2. Presence of web reinforcement restricts the growth of the diagonal cracks and their
penetration into the compression zone. Therefore, more concrete is available to resist the
combined actions of shear and compression.
3. The stimrps also counteract the widening of the cracks so that the two cracked faces stay
in contact. As a result, the contribution of aggregate interlock (V1 ) does not drop
suddenly.
4. The stimrps tie the longitudinal steel into the main bulk of the concrete which in turn
provides some measure of restraint against the splitting of concrete along the longitudinal
reinforcement. Hence, the contribution of dowel action (V ) is increased or would not
drop rapidly.
5. Failure will be imminent when the stimrps begin to yield. After this point, the
contribution of stimps does not increase, and additional loads have to be resisted by
basic mechanisms in members similar to those with no web reinforcement.
The above observations are illustrated schematically in Figure 10. As seen from this figure, after
cracking contribution of V. (shear strength provided by web reinforcement) increases linearly
while V"" * V6 * V, (i.e., the shear resistance provided by concrete) remains nearly constant.
When the stimrps yield, the value of V. does not change, and additional applied loads increase
the crack width which in turn reduces the value of V, and V. The member fails when the
diagonal cracks penetrate well into the compression zone leading to loss of V"".
Vin t
Vc
d \s
iy
Vs
Flexural
crackng Inclined yielding of Failure
cracking stirrups
Figure 10. Redistribution of Internal Shear Resistance (Vn1) Mechanisms for Beams with Stimrps
lt3
r
CVE 482 BMS
r The total shear in beams with shear reinforcement is the sum of the shear resistance provided by
concrete V" which is taken as V.. : Va * Y"r* Vy and web steel V.. Note that the individual
magnitudes of V, V"", and Vy are unknown. As explained above, V", : v.. bd where v.. :
t- 1.9{f + 2500 (pVd)/M < 3.5{f An expression for V, is derived with reference to Figure 1 1.
" ".
lbw-l
S s S s S
V cz t-1
{-.c
t-
ttt
r
ltl
ll
I
I
I
t
I 4u
I
I
I
ttt I I zl
I
rtl I I

ltt I I
I
r- --J--t--J-
-F- -+- :l: -*-
-- *_
I
T
V I
I
P
R
K
rl
t
t
Figure 11. Forces in a Diagonal Crack in a Beam with Shear Reinforcement
V. : n Au fu where n : number of stimrps crossing diagonal crack; Au : total cross-sectional area

of stimrps crossing diagonal crack; and f, : stress in stimrps. Assuming that the diagonal cracks
are approximately at 45 degrees, the value of n:
d/s in which d:
effective depth and s spacing :
of stimrps. (Note that n : d/s implies that cracks are steeper than 45 degrees.) At the ultimate
limit state, the transverse steel has reached yield stress; so fu: fy.
Therefore, Vn (nominal shear strength) : V. * V,
where V" : (1.9r/f . + 2500pVd/M)bd < 3.5{f . bd (all in psi units)

V. : (A"&td)/s
Note that since the shear is resisted by web, the value of b : b* i.e., the beam web width.
lf a beam has a tapered web, which is typical in joist construction, use the average width for b.'.
lf the narrowest width is in compression, take minimum width as b*.
I
I
t-
T14
I
t
I
L-
cvB 482 BMS
DESIGN OF SHEAR REINFORCEMENT \\
Note that strength reduction.factor for shear
is 0.75 and NOT 0.9, which is the valuefor
1. u.rublish the ultimate shear envelope diagram.
flexure.
2 o Determine shear strength provided by concrete, i.e. QV. where 0:0.75 and V. is computed
from the following expressions, which are for normal weight concrete.
(a) Simplified expressions
ACI 11.2.1.1 For members subject to shear and shear flexure only
V":2 f'" b,' d

where
f.: concrete compressive strength in psi, which is limited to 10,000 psi (ACI $11.1.2
limits J7 " ro 100 psi) unless ACI provisions stipulated in ACI 1 I.l.2.l are met, i.e., the
minimum area of shear reinforcement is
o.7sJn W f'rand r,
fr, For uormal weight cncrete, )" : 1, l" - (-).85
but not less than f<rr sand-lightrvcight cencrete, and ?" - 0.?5
1br ali-li ght-q'eight cr,crcte.
50b;
.fr: Psi units
fr,
f, )r
tt :yield stress of stimrps in psi;
b*: width of web;
s: stimrp spacing; and
d: effective depth (i.e., distance from the compression face to tension bars)
ACI 11.2.1.2 For members subject to axial compre SSlON
v":2U*ffilt f' ( b,,d
where
Nr: compressive load in lbs; and
Ar: cross-sectional area in in2.
Note: The shear capacity is increased because the axial load prevents growth of the
cracks, and the crack widths are kept small. As a result, shear resistance through
aggregate interlock is enhanced.
ACI 11.2.1.3 For members subject to significant axial tension, shear resistance of
concrete is ignored.
115
r
CVE 482 BMS
(b) Detailed Expressions
|.-
For members subject to shear and flexure only

I ^CI11.2.2.1
v
": 0.gL,[ " " zs00p,,u )b,d 3 s.s rff "6,d
+
where
t-
P*: A, /b*d;
A.: area of longitudinal reinforcement; and
l'- Vu and Mu : factored shear and moment at section. Note that (V" d)/M" cannot be taken
I
greater than 1.0.
members subject to axial compression

t- ^CIll.2.2.2For -
F'or notmal rveiglrt concrete" l, = t).85
, ": t.sl,{-L+ zsoop*U)b.d f'trr sar:d-lightrveight onre re, nd?u: {1.75
for all -li ght-$,eiehr concreie.
< s.s ,[7 ',
a t-
N,
"*d 500 ,
(4h d)
M,n: M, N,
I
where h: member depth. If the value of M. becomes negative, use
v
":3.5 F" I .y',
5001,
AClll.2.2.3 For members subject to significant axial tension
V,:2F" I+500N' >o

,
where Nu is negative for tension.
3 . The maximum factored shear (V,) at "d" from the face of the support can be used for design
of sections located less than a distance "d" from face of support if ACI requirements
described in ACI 1 I .1.3 are met. Both of the following conditions have to be met.
(l)
support reaction, in direction of applied shear, introduces compression into the
end regions of member, and
(2) no concentrated load occurs between face of support and distance "d" from the
face of the support.
I Some examples illustrating these conditions are shown below.
t
I
I
L.
i
L- 116
L
cvB 482 BMS
L,J
(1) (2) (3)
ACI 1 1.1.3 requirements are not met for the following examples. Therefore, the value of shear at
the face of the support is used.
.+
( I
lllil
V
i
I
----->l
(1) (2) (3)

4. ,rUr: Vu/Q - V. at the critical section exceedsS.rfl,d, increase size of section to enhance
shear strength of the concrete. (ACI $ lI.4.7.9limits V. to z,,lu,,a .
5- . Select a practical stimrp shape and size (No. 3, 4, or 5). Shear reinforcement
may consist of
stimrps or welded wire fabric perpendicular to axis of member. Although less common,
shear reinforcement may also consist of stimrps making an angle of 45 degrees or more with
longitudinal tension reinforcement, longitudinal reinforcement bent making an angle of 30
degrees or more with the longitudinal tension reinforcement, a combination of stimrps and
bent longitudinal bars, and spirals.
Aftr selecting the stimrp shape and size, stimrp spacing (s) will be the only unknown in V,
: (A"fd)/s. In this equation, 4' : area of shear reinforcement, d : effective depth, s :
stimrp spacing, and t : yield strength of shear reinforcement which cannot exceed 60,000
rt7
r
CVE 482 BMS
I psi except for welded deformed wire fabric that can have design yield strength up to 80,000
psi.
t-
6 o Determine the required stirrup spacing meeting the ACI $11.4.5 requirements, which are
summarized below.
I
For regions where V" < Il2 Q V", stimrps are not necessary
r-
I
I a ll2v"< vu < 0v. Provide minimum sti.mrps according to the following spacing
requirements.
T
I d \"\"L'
, r$'''
I
2
il
Note: In thefollowing equations, A, is
24 the total area of shear reinforcement.
S,nu* I lIL
5ob* -f,: Psi units
f'"and fr:psi units

585',
0.7 f '"b-
Note: The minimum stimrp requirement does not apply to the following cases:
o Slabs & footings;

o Concrete joists as defined byACI $8.13
o Beams with total depth (h) not greater than 10"
o Beams integral with slabs with total depth (h) not greater than24" and
not greater than the larger of 2.5 times thickness of flange, and 0.5
times of web.
4,fy,d
f
t
o Vu > 0V" Calculate the spacing of stimrps from Z" =
s
; however, the value of
o's"
from this equation is limited to the following values:
l.
I
d
I
2
I
t- 24
Arfyt
50bw
-fr: Psi units
I
I -f'"and .fr: psi units
,- 0.75 f '"b*
I
I
I
L- 118
I
I
L
CVE 482 BMS
!
4
I2 il
TTL fr: Psi units

50bw
Av
-f , and -f, : psi units
'
0.7 f '"b*
r Keep s > 4 in. This is a good practice and not a code requirement.
o Note that the spacing computed for (V,) at rrdrr from the face of the supports will be also
used from this point back to the supports.
The aforementioned provisions can be summarized as shown below.

Face of support
this point
VS = 4t b*d
Vu V
'c 1t2 v
J
I
d I
1 d
Co m p S pacr ng 2
inimum Stirrup
fro m 24
x
s Arfy,
s 5(
50bw
0. f'rb,
4 d
4
2
12" lt
24
s( A,fy, 3( 4fy
50bw
50bw
A,f u,
0.75,J f 'cbw 0;7 f 'rb*
119
t-
CVE 482 BMS
r Note: Not all the regions shown herein may always be present. It is possible that a case may
involve only region, e.g., Vu <Il2 V.", or all the four regions may have to be checked if the shear
demand (Vu; is large.
t-
7 . Place the first stimrp at a distance equal to half-spacing from the support. If stimrps are
closely spaced (approximately 4 in.), place the first one at a full spacing.
t-
8. to ensure that stimrps fit in the beam, provide the following minimum beam widths.
t- Minimum Beam Width
Stimrp size b- (in.)

t.-
I
No.3 t0
No.4 12
t
No.5 T4
9 . Specify the.largest reasonable and fewest number of stimrps, and the smallest number of
variations in stimrp spacing.
10. Do not use truss-bent bars because of fabrication and placing standpoints. In addition, if
the loads reverse direction (e.g., wind loads), such bars are undesirable structurally
f
t
t
t-
L. t20
I
L
cvE 482 BMS
DESTGN OF R.C. FLEXURAL MEMBERS FOR SHEAR
Example I The beam shown below carries l.6klft live load and 0.9 k/ft dead load (including
:
beam weight). The beam is simply supported over a 22-ft span. Using f" 3,000 psi and Grade
40 reinforcement, investigate the beam for stimrp ud3f"Tj;l*"1i1,i?9.:rign if necessary.
1st stirrup is at
3" from face of support c.L. t-_ B.o = 60"
I
I l
T
22" 4" J No. 3
3No.7
t 3No.9
1
9@6"
12"
d: 18"
Cross Section
I 1'-0"
Establish shear envelope
6LL = 2.56 klft

'l 2DL = 1.08 k/ft
I I Case (a)
40.04 k 40.04 k
1 6LL = 2.56 klft
2DL = 1.08 k/ft

I Case (b)
33k 18.9 k
1 .6LL = 2.56 klft
2DL = 1.08 k/ft

I Case (c)
18 9 33k
22
For each case, plot the shear diagrams and superimpose them to establish the shear envelope, as
illustrated below.
t2t
t"
cvf. 482 BMS
45 Support C.L
40.04
40
Load Case a
35
\ Load Case b
30 -r
-*-}* Load Case c
-1 r
25
\ J * " Shear Envelope
20
15
\ __*\
10
5
-Y
t 0
-5
L\\
-10 -\
\*
-15
-20 -
-25
-30 -\
-35
-40
-45
0246 I 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
Distance (ft.)
Note: The straight-line shear envelope is a conset'vative approximation of the actual envelope
Compute the value of shear at the critical section, which is "d" from the face of the support.
v
" @d
rrom the support race : 7 .04 +ttt+][ i,U, - tr{ + fi= to.o o,o,
v,.:2 L,[7, b,, d: zxr.rfu00(12x18) =23,660tb=23.7 kips
v.s.6
= Ur/- 2(o.l 1)(40x18)
= 26.4 kips
Vu, provided : 0 (V"+V.): 0.75(23.7+26A):31 .6 kips >Maximum Vu, required
: 34.0 kips
Therefore, the available stimrps provide adequate strength.
Are the stimrps extended far enough?
Need to provide stimrps until Vu <Il2V"
1l2QV":8.87 kips
t22
cvE 482 BMS
45 Support C.L.
40
35
30
Stirrups should be provided up to
ris point
Ezs
J
3ro
15
124.67'
10
7.04
5 0.5V.=9.97
0
011223344 55 66 77 88 99 110 121 132
Distance (in.)
Therefore, the stimrps are terminated too soon, and must be extended further
For 0.5QV"<V'<QV., provide minimum web reinforcement
d
2
tt-n" Controls
il 2
24
24"
S,nu^ I
Arfyt
frt: Psi units
S,nu* I 0.11x 2 x 40,000
50bw = 14.6"
50(12)
Av 0.11x 2 x 40,000
-f'rand .fr: psi units = 17.85"
0.75 f '"b, 0.7 3000(12)
Hence, the web reinforcement cannot be placed more than 9,, apart.
At the critical section, Vu = 34.0 kips;

Vu: Q(V.+V'); V. : V,/0 -V. : (34.010.75) -23.7 :2I.6 kips. This shear is the maximum shear
that has to be resisted by the stimrps.
V, : 2l .6 .S ,[f\ b,. d = 94.8 kips Therefore, beam dimensions are o.k.
t23
t-
CVE 482 BMS
r 4
^,rn by, d =4,'Fo00 x 12 x tB = 47323 tb = 47 .3kips
Since V.:21.6 kips .4 F, b,, d:47.3 kips

t-
d t8-9"
2 Controls
2
t- 24" 24"
l'-
S,nu" I IL .fy : Psi units i S'u* I 0.1 1x 2x 40,000
= 14.6"
I 50bw s0(12)
0.11x 2x40,000
-f'"and .fr: psi units = 17.85"
t- 0.7 f '"b. 0 zs.oo(rz)
Compute the required stimrp spacing to resist the maximum shear, which occurs at the
critical section.
Arfy,d (0.22X40X18)
V. _ 21.6= s = 7.33"
s
A,fy,d : 0.22(40)18 v"=2,[-f), & Q=0.75

^t 7
V, (kips Distance from the face of the support beyond which

s (in.) 0V":0ry c the can be ata ln.
7 34.7 15.3
8 19.8 32.6 23.8
9 17.6 30.9 30.4
Note that the stimrps cannot be placed more than 9" apart; therefore, larger values of "s"
were not considered.
Layout of stimrps
No. 3 U stinups c.L.

I
l
t-
i
I
t- r24
I
L
;
cvB 482
BMS
Comparison of Capacit) and Demand
50 C.L. of support
Capacity
40 CriticalSection
34.7
30.9
30
!
: [ot
20
Provided Capacity
10
7.O4
0
01234 56 7891011
Distance (fr.)
125
t-
cvB 482 BMS
t- CALCULAT]ON OF STIRRUP SPACING
Copyilght 1995 and 1997,2002,2008
Bahram il, Shahrooz, Ph.D., P.E., FACI
University of Cincinnati
Thls spreadsheet computes required stirrup spacng according to ACI 318-2008
t- Note that ACI simplfied expressions for Vc have been used.
This spreadsheet s appliceble only to normal weight concrete.
INPUT DATA
t- Enter data only n the GREEN spaces below.
Concrete compressive strength (fc ) - psi 3000

(modficaton factor for lightweight concrete) I
t- Width of web ( - inches t2
Beam effectve depth (d) - inches 18
Axial load (Nu) - lbs 0
r Gross cross-sectional area (An) - in2

ls ACI 1 '1.1.3 met?
Vu at center line of support - lbs
0
yes
40040
ACt 1r.1.3 :
(a) compressive support reactions, and
V" at end of region - lbs 7040 (b) no concentrated load between support face and "d" from support face
Support width - nches t2
t Length of region - inches 132 Length of region is from support center line to end of region
Stirrup sze J Maximum practicalstirup size is No. 6
No. of stirup legs 2
Yield strength of stinups (f) - psi 40000 fvt <= 60,000 psi except for welded wire fabrc that can have ff <= 80,000 psi
SOLUTION
Overall beam size is o.k.
Distance from face of support beyond which Stirrup spacing Note: Zero spacing means that stirrups are no longer needed
the stinup spacing cen be used (inches) s (inches) Note: The first spacing is calculated at the critical location.
Note: The first calculated spacing is applicable back to the support face.
18.00 7.29
27.O0 8.46
36.00 9.00
45.00 9.00
54.00 9.00
63.00 9.00
72.00 9.00
8l.00 9.00
90.00 9.00
99.00 9.00
108.00 9.00
1 17.00 9.00
126.00 0.00
t
I
I
t-
I
t-
t
I
I
L- r26
I
L
CVE 482 BMS
DESIGN OF R.C. FLEXURAL MEMBERS FOR SHEAR
Example 2 Design the required spacing of shear stimrps (open U shaped stirrups) for a simply
supported beam. The span is 12 ft. and the cross section is provided below. The service dead
load (including self weight) is 5.2 Wft and service live load is 10.0 k/ft. Use f. : 3,500 psi and
Grade 60 reinforcement.
F1
21.5"
aa
aao
5 No.10
12',-O',
Establish shear envelope
.6LL = 16 Uft
? ! I
1.2DL= 6.24 klt
/ I Ir / I 7\
7 7
Case (a)
-s.
1.6LL = 16 ldft
/
1.2L= 6.24 klft
/ I I
Case (b)
.$
fl] d 'r.4
1.611 = 16 ldft
i Ii i Y 1.2DL= 6.24 klft

7 IiJJ Case (c)
x.4 **,4
12',
\bq' i" ::i-i( I t

t
r27
W:l""rvr'rr 'd#[ ] l,s +{. (rt'r1
cv, 4B2 VuoI -*
Vl1kr
L "I u)
-- 13),'' - rA
lv ;1f .
(r{
ur,*j"f-
l7 BMS
t- >/" ,k ,l.rn
150 133.44
Load Case a
t-
100 \ -r Load Case b
*@*
r \ r3) Load Case c
* - Shear Envelope
50 24
I .Y
Support C.L
0
=
t-
-50 \_
t
-100
-1 50
0 2 4 6 I 10 12
Distance (ft.)
Vu at the critical section ( from the face of the :91.6 kips

{tYry^*q LO
v,:2Lrl-f," b,,d:2 x r.rffio1rz)(2r.5)= 30,500 tb=30.5 kips .,gr:,il{s't,[*^' i
Vu :0 (V.+V,)
91,6:0.75(30.5+ V.)
,.'
V.:9l.7kips.eJ-L b* d "{l4-0f\'\\'7
:122 kips o.k., the overall beam dimensions are adequate
Need to provide stimrps until Vu <ll2V"
t
UzY": 0.5(0.75)(30.5) : 11.4 kips :0.7 s/' l15
t The smallest shear exceeds Il2Y"; hence, stimrps need to be provided over the entire span. \.l o 6.rrs
At the critical section, V,:91.7 kip> +,17, b,, d:61 kips
t
Compute the required stimrps to resist the maximum shear that occurs at the critical section.
L Assume No. 3 stimrps
L r28
L
CVE 482 BMS
,r=U{; 91.7=q?@; s=3.1" This spacing is less than 4,,. Try No. 4
stimrps in an effort to increase the spacing above 4"
(2x0.2)(60X21.s)
V
^
=Arfy/
s
, 9r.7 =
.
; s= 5.63" Therefore, use No. 4 stimrps.
$ d
44-2r'5 =5.375" Controls
T2"
\41 \
Forregions where V, > 4 ,[7" U", O Sru*S L_ (0.2 x 2X6o,ooo)
= 40,,
50bw 50(12)
_ (0.2 x 2)(60,000)
T,.. I
-
0.7 f '"b, 0.75V3,500(12)
Note: To resst the maximum shear demands, stirrups at 5.63" are needed, but
sno*<5.375"; therefore,satthecriticalsectionis<5.375". Spacingof5.3T5"hastobe
maintained until V,. 4 J f\ b,. d .
! =?lj = 10.75,, contrors

22
24"
For regions where V, < 4 ,F, U,,, O S,nu* S !4t- (0.2 x 2X6o,ooo)
= 40,,
sbw s0(12)
A,f ,,,d 0.40(60)21.s (0.2 x 2X60,000)

= 45.1"
s ,s 0.7 f ',bn 0.7 3,500(12)
Note: The smallest shear (24 kips) exceeds 0V" : 22.9 kips; therefore, minimum stimrp
rement does not apply to this problem.
1"r.,,,,,,,i
{.1, S }; i;s
\55,"1 -(., ) ,1/,.
(in.) Distance from the face of the support beyond which
s V. (kips) QV":S(V"+V,) the stimrps can be placed at a larser (in.)
5 rc3.2 100.3 15 8.
6 86.0 87.4 24.3
7 73.7 78.2 30.4
8 64.s 7r.3 34.9
9 s7.3 6s.9 38.4
l0 51.6 6r.6
fnef .\\ \'\

t' ,-\t
t29 rdl,'\ \5,b-
t:
CVE 482 BMS
tr Note: The maximum spacing is 5.375" until V, drops below b,, d . V, is equal to
4
Jn
from the face of the support. Therefore, although the above calculations
rr M^!"dat3!!
indicate that stimrps can be spaced, e.9., at 8'] beyond 34.9", requirements on S-u* control and
stimrps spaced at not larger than 5.375" have to be provided up to 36.6" from the face of the
support. Beyond 36.6- from the face of the support, the maximum spacing of stimrps is 10.75".
tr
Final stimrp detail
t No.4 U Stirrups;
/ c.L.
tr
I
tl
8s 5',
t 2"
Comparison of Capacitv and Demand
150 C.L. of support

Capacity
t_ 133.4
120 Critical /
1
section/
t_ 100.3
I J
:
90
v1.3
t 60
L 30
t 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Distance (ft.)
t (
tu
l, 130
Lj
CVE 482 BMS
CALCULAION OF STIRRUP SPACING
Copyright 1995 and 1997, 2002,2008
Bahram M: Shahrooz, Ph.D., P.E., FACI
University of Gincinnati
This spreadsheet computes required strrup spacing according to ACI 318-2008
Note that ACI simplifed expressions for Vc have been used.
This spreadsheet is applicable only to normal weight concrete.
INPUT DATA
Enter data only in the GREEN spaces below.
Concrete compressve strength (f" ) - ps 3500

I (modification factor for lightweght concrete) 1
Width of web (b,) - inches 12

Beam effectve depth (d) - inches 2t.s
Axial load (N,) - lbs 0
Gross cross-sectonal area (An) - in2 0
ls ACI 11.1.3 met? yes ACt ll.l.3 :
Vu et center lne of support - lbs 133400 (a) compressive support reactions, and
Vu at end of region - lbs 24000 (b) no concentrated load between support face and "d" from support face
Support width - nches t2
Length of region - inches 72 Length of region is from support center lne to end of region
Sthrup size 4 Maximum practical stinup size is No. 6
No. of stirrup legs ')
Yield strength of stirups (f) - ps 60000 ff <= 60,000 psi except for welded wre fabric that cn have fn <= 80,000 psi
SOLUTION
Overall beam size is o.k.
Distance from face of support beyond which Stirrup spacing Note: Zero spacing means that stirrups are no longer needed
the stirrup spacing can be used (inches) s (inches) Note: The first spacing is calculated at the critical location.
Note: The first calculated spacng is applicable back to the support face.
21.50 5.38
25.21 5.38
28.92 5.38
32.63 5.38
36.33 5.38
40.04 9.54
43.75 10.75
47.46 10.75
51.17 10.75
54.88 0.75
58.58 10.75
62.29 10.75
66.00 10.75
131
t-
CVE. 482 BMS

Example of Shear Envelope The beam shown below supports un-factored dead load of 2.5 Wft
and un-factored live load of 1.5 k/ft. The dead load includes the weight of the beam.
(a) Draw shear force diagrams for
factored live and dead load on the entire length of the beam.
factored live load on the entire span plus factored live load between B and C.
,- factored dead load on the entire span plus factored live load between A and B and
between C and D.
(b) Draw the shear force envelope diagram.
(c) Design transverse reinforcement. Use f c : 3,500 psi and Gr. 60 stimrps.
A B c D
8'-0" 8'-0u 6'-0u
1_
24" 2 5',
L aaa
----*l12"1.-
Cross Section
"LL*,4 k/ft
'f
1.2DL=3 k/ft
Case 1
4, .
'1 l I :? d" !/f*

1.2D1=3 k/ft
Case 2
?4 s
1" Si*L=2 "4 kJit

I rf I I I I
1.2DL=3 k/ft
Case 3
L
*i
r32
cvE 482 BMS
40
\ 32.4
\
30
\
1
20 \ 1.425 I I
1 0
U'
o-
0
\
\ I \
N
=
(
o -10 j
U)
\ \
-20 \
\ -34.875
- Case \
-30 1
-10.875 { -41.775
Case 2 \
-40 -
-dr Case 3
-49.275
-50
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I 9 101112 1314 151617 1819202122
Distance (ft.)
133
lr
CVE 482 BMS
40
\
30
20
x \
\

o-
-V
1 0
0
\ Ix &
( \
o -10
-c
a \
\
-20
\
-30 *O- Case 1
Case 2 \ t
-40 -
-A- Case 3
\
-50
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I 9 101112 1314 151617 1819202122
Distance (ft.)
t34
cvB 482 BMS
40
r
30 \
20
x \
\
\ \
\
\ \ \
I0
(n
o-
N\ 1
}-
\
0
= \ i
( \
o -10
-c
\
U)
\ \ \
-20
\
j
-30 Case 1
\
Case 2 l
-40 -4- Case 3 Shear [nvelope
\
I
-50
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I 9 101112 1314 151617 1819202122
Distance (ft.)
I
1!
i
13s
r- - r*- ii
CVE 482 BMS
40
t
30
\
t\
\
20
\
\
\ \
1 0
(t) \ \
o-
0
= J i
( \
o -10 L
-c
U)
\
-20
\
\
-30
\
\
-40
\
-50
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 I 9 101112 1314 151617 1819202122
Distance (ft.)
t36
CYE 482 BMS
Shear Analvsis Example
The beam of the one-bay frame shown in the figure below carries a design uniform load of
5.9k/rt (the design shear envelope is provided below). The frame supports are 24inx24in
reinforced concrete columns and the beam is l4inxISin. All of the concrete is 5frsi concrete and
all of the steel is Gr. 60. You have been asked to evaluate the shear capacity of beam in this
frame for the given stimrp layout, and to approve the shear reinforcement or make
recommendations on the redesign of the stimrps (if necessary).
Evaluate the spacing of the stimrps. If the spacing needs to be modified, make recommendations.
Be sure to make all appropriate checks.
w"=SSVf t
iliIiiii;iiiI l-ri
tttr t illiiiii;iir
#3 U-Stirrups
.
r.
1l-0"
,- I
2r_0il
,/l
22'-0" ra
14"
t-l
26t-0tl
r37
r- cvB 482 BMS
t- , q
w;=5.9kut
ii;,il;iii,
r
t- t
t-
r
I
I (9) @4" (8) @7" (4',)@e"
r
t
11r_0il
tr'ace of Support
- Critical Section
t'
71.5k
Besigp $her
Esvclqp l6k
5.5tt 116.5'r
Solution
Determine Location of Critical Section
The beam support connection causes the beam to be in compression and there are no
concentrated loads between the face of the support and "d" (L5.5in) out form the face of the
support. Therefore, the critical section is 15.5 inches from the face of the support, and the
maximum design shear demand is 60.9frs (refer to provided shear envelope).
I
i Check Overall Section Size
I The overall dimension of the beam should be such that the maximum demand on the stimrps is
t^ I-
less than V" <8rlf,.b*d .The maximum shear demand is 60.9 kips.
V,, = QVn= Q(V"+V,)
I
I
60.9kips = (0.75)
2xl 5, 000psi ( 1 4 in)(l 5.5 in)
+ Vs
i I,000psi I l<si
t 60.9 kips = 23kips + 0.7 5V,

I
t- V, = 50.5kips
I
I
l-
I 138
t-
:
:L
cvE,482 BMS
5, 000psi (I 4 in)(I 5 .5 in)

B"[7)b,,d = =l23kips
I,000psi I ksi
V,,-u* = 50.5kips < +r[,t,a = l23kips
.'. Section dimensions are adequate
Compute the Critical Values Defining the Different Stimrp Spacing Regions
No stimrp are requiredforV. QV,

2
1 2xt 5, 000psi ( 1 4 in)(I 5 .5 in)

Q[/" = = 15.3kips = V,.în = I6kips
2 [;) I,000psi I ksi
.'. All regions of the beam require at least minimum stimrps
Minimum stimrps are requirea wfren j0 V" <I/, < QV,
QV
"
= r())*, = (2)(L 5 .3kip s) = 3 0.6 kips
Minimum stimrps are required for 1,5.3kips <V, <30.6kips
The minimum stimrp spacing is
d 15.Sin
7.75in
2 2
24in
5(mox A,f, _ (2Xo.t lrn'?X60,ooopst)

50b, (sQQain)
=lg.9in
(2X0. I 1,n'? X60,000psr)
= 17 .8in
0.7 f'bw
c 0.7 5,000psi(I4in)
'. s =7.75in
Additionally, the maximum shear at the critical section is

o 60.9 kips> @V" = 30.6kips. Therefore, the two criteria for stimrp spacing based on
stimrp strength must be checked. That is tt, = 4,{,b,d .
t39
t- CVE 482 BMS
t- Check Stimrp Spacing Based on Stimrp Strength
I V.t = 4r[-f'b,,d =
5, 000psi
I,000psi
(I 4 in)(l
I ksi
5 .5 in)
= 61.4kips
The largest demand on the stimrps will occur at the critical section where
V,,:60.9 kips.The demand on the stimrps at that location is
l'-
I The design shear at lt, = 4r{"b.,dcorresponds to
r
I
V, = QVn = Q(V" +f,)
,,, = Q(rxyfJ' ,,a * +,[i,a)
5, 000psi ( 1 4 in)(I 5 .5 in)

rr,, = Q(er[-f,n-a)= fo:s)
t,000psi I ksi
V, = 69kiqs
The design shear demand at the critical section is 60.9kips is less than the design
shear strength (69kips) corresponding to 7t,=4,[lbd. Therefore, the region of
stimrp spacing corresponding ro V, > +,[-J),,d does not apply.
The maximum stimrp spacing when stimrp spacing for Vu greater than Vncorresponding
I-
to V,34rlf;b"d is the same for minimum stimrps. In addition, spacing based on
as that
the demand on the stimrps must be checked. At the critical section, the required spacing
is
t. A,f,d (2)(o.ttin'?)(60ksi)(t5.5in)
^ _ ---:---:::-
5= = 4.05kips
V" 50.5kips
I
l- Generate a Table Tabulating the Design Shear Strengths Based on Stimrp Spacing
The spacing shown in the table ranges from s:4in to s:7in; s:4in is the smallest spacing
required at the critical section, and s:7in corresponds to the largest spacing permittd foi
minimum stimrps.
I
I
i
L
I
L
t40
t-
.n
cvB 482 BMS
Face of Su
Distance From Face of Support
s Vs $Vn:Q(V.+V,) Where Spacing Can Be Started
(in) (kips) (kips) (in)
4 51 6l t4
5 4t 54 34
6 34 49 47
7 29 45 57
State Conclusions on Provided Stimlp Layout
1) The calculated minimum stimrp spacing is7.75in (say 7in). The provided stimrp layout
at mid-span of the beam shows (8)-spaces at 9in which is greater than s^,,:7.75in.
Therefore, the spacing in that region must be decreased.
2) The provided stimrp layout shows the 7in stimrp spacing starting at a distance of 40in
from the face of the support. The 7in spacing is not adequate at this point. Referring to
the table above, the 7in spacing is not adequate in the region between the face of the
support and a distance of 57in from the face of the support. Therefore, the stimrps spaced
at7"o.c. must be rearranged.
3) The figure below shows a recommended spacing and corresponding demand-capacity

plot.
,E
IQil 1I
^^n
(71) @4" @
132"
Face of Support
Critical Section
I
66.9k 60.9k
71.5k rl , 61.0
Capacity
49.Ok
45-Ok
Demand t6k
5.5tt 116.5"
Recommended Stirrup Lavout and Shear Demand-Capacitv Plot
t4t
r- CVE 482 BMS
r- Shear Desisn
A simply supported beam must carry a service uniform dead load of 5.375k/ft (includes self-
I weight) and a service uniform live load of Sllft. The span of the beam is 20ft, the compressive
strength of the concrete is 3,000psi, and GR. 60 steel is used for all reinforcement. Design the
shear reinforcement for the beam based on a shear envelope. Draw a sketch of the elevation of
I the beam showing the locations, size, and spacing of the shear reinforcement. Additionally,
provide a plot of the calculated shear capacity against a plot of the shear envelope to verify you
r
I
I
have adequate shear strength. A cross-section of the beam is shown below.
Service 16fr
Loads
I
I
, II i il-i' i ii ; i r i Ii ; i li rlowt #5 Stirrups
iil i
I
DL:5.375Ht o\
t
,r
ru, la d.
F
Solution
Generate a Shear Envelope
Assume three load cases: (1) dead and live load over the entire length of the beam, (2) dead load
over the entire length, and live load on the left half of the span, and (3) dead load over the entire
length and live load on the right half of the span. The loading is shown below along with the
^ resulting shear diagrams for the three cases and the shear envelope. The shear envelope shown
below is for ultimate shear loads. Therefore, the loads used are factored loads (the loads given in
the problem statement are service loads and therefore, must be used in an appropriate load
combination. In this case
w, = L2D + l.6L = (1.2)(5.37 5k I ft) + (1.6)(5.0k I ft)

w =6. 4sk I ft +8.0k I ft
I
l,_
I
I
L
I
[-
I
r42
i
t-
CVE 482 BMS
ri
LCl rtt lttrtttttttttttr , LL:8.01e/f

t
I I
l
DL:6.54Hf
ili .li
I -i-
l I
I
LL=8.01c/f t
LCz t I
l t
I
i,,;;;r, i
I
I I t , DL=6'5t{t
ttil li_.]
il
rtt LL:8.Hf t
I
lt i
LC3
I
ri
ttt
ilr
tt
i
I II lt DL=6.541{
L44.s Shear Oiasrams
1s0
t00 \
a 50
\ i-...
\ 20
\ \ --.
0 l.
L I
G
q) -\
-
IT
\ \
s
u) -50 -20
,.
\
-100 I
l\r
-144.L
-I50
0246 810L2 L4 t6 18 20
Location fft)
The shear envelope for the three shear diagrams shown above are plotted in the figure below
I 43
--e
I cvB 482 BMS
I Shear Envelone
t44.5
t- 150
.> L
I t00
\ \-
so
r- c
:l
l
)l
0
-,:.:
.--:::t"...
...."..
ti'
; l -s0 -29 \ - '.1f"-...
I ;-"-.. ..-.
{ i... "!'
r- -100
t\\
I
I
-150
-r44.L S
o246 810t2 t4 16 l8 20
Location (ft)
Note that the shear envelope is symmetric about a vertical axis at mid-span of the beam.
Therefore, only one-half of the shear envelope needs to be considered, and the shear
reinforcement design can simply be mirrored about mid-span of the beam. The figure below
shows the shear envelope for the left half of the beam.
Shear Envelooe
L44.5
150
L25
I
i
t- \
100
âa
t \
t
t- El 7s
20.
r.l \-
tl8l
s0
a' zs
0
!
l
i
l'
-25
0l2t 456 78910
I
t- Location (ft)
t-
r44
L-
cvB 482 BMS
Determine the Location of the Critical Section
Since no information is given about the supports, assume that the faces of the supports are
located directly at the pin (on the left) and roller (on the right). Since there are no concentrated
loads located within a distance "d" (in this case, 19.5in) for the faces of the two supports, and the
loads and reactions cause the beam at the support to be in compression, ACI permits the shear
design to be base on the factored shear at "d" from the support. Thus, the critical section is at
I9.5in from both ends of the beam. The figure below shows the locations of the critical sections
and the corresponding design shear values.
The design shear at the critical section is
( ru+.Snipt - 20kips\(I9.5in)
V", =144-5kiPs - not,
I )
V",. =I24.3kips
Shear at Critical Section

t44.5
150 L24.3
\ I
L25
100
a

.-
l 75 \
L 20
CE
50 \- \
-
) T\ \ I
r \
\
1
19.5" I urrucu
^./.

25 section *
-t I -
0
t
I
_t5
0L2345678910
Location (ftl
Check that the Overall Section Dimensions are Adequate
145
r CVE 482 BMS
t: t-
Recall that the value of V, may not exceed 8,,lf,b*d. This is checked at the critical section.
V, =V",.=I24.3kiPs
l.
v-2 u[-r;,a 2xl
c
3, 000psl
I,000psi
( 1 6 in)(19 .5
I ksi
in)
=34kips
r v, = QV,
V,= Q(V.+V")
I v. =+ -r/. =t'!T!' - 34kips = r32kips
'Q"0.75
tr
t- 3, 000psl (1 6in)(19 .5 in)
V, =l32kips <811f b*d = =I37kips OK
r l,000psi I li
.'. Section size is adequate for shear
I Determine the required stimp spacing per the four different regions required by ACI
I
t- Stimrps are not required when V,3 QV"
2
1 1
z\[-f)u-a=
2xl 3, 000psi ( 1 6 in)(19 .5 in)
QV" --$
2'
(0.75)
2 l,000psi I lcsi
I
t c =I3kips>V
V , _,_ -2kips
a,mln
2
.'. at least minimum stimrps are required over
L. entire length of the beam.
t Minimum stimrp spacing is required when V, <0V"
2xl
t QV"=qZ{)U.a=(0.75)
000psi(I6in)(l9.sin)
l,000psi I lesi
QV" = 26kips 1Vn = l24.3kips
L .'. minimum stimrps are required where V, <26kips
and the demand on the stimrps for V, > 26kips
L needs to be evaluated.
Stimrp spacing above that required for minimum spacing is required when Vu > QV".
L'
There are two conditions for this criterion
t
t46
r.i
cvB 482 BMS
(r) v,<+,[,,,a 4{3,000 psi(l6in)(l9.5in\ ,or.:.

+{,,a _ = On?j
_
(2) V,, +,{,,a I,000 psi I l<si
The maximum shear that the stimrps must resist (at the critical section) was calculated
previously to be l32kips.
v" = r32kips ) v, = +,[;,a = 68kips
.'. The criteria for Vs < +,[)u,a applies

and the criterai for V,, +,{-f),a applies
All four of the specified stimrp

spacing regions need to be considered in this design. The figure
shown below shows graphically the applicable regions.
Stirnrn Snacins Resions

L44.5
L24.3 Critical
HO
Section
L25
\ B
r00 I
D\ \- c \
a
- \
.
,{ 75 =l-\,-
L \
CE
() 50
qerffl,a =n \-
\
I-
v2 QY.=26k \ \l
25 \
0
- 19.5"
I J - 0.56V"=13 + -t?
-t 20/
-25
0t23456789I0
Location (ft)
In region A (V,, < QV,), no stimrps are required (does not apply to this design)
r47
,
t- CVE 482 BMS
t- I
In reeions B ( QV, <V,, <QV,), minimum stimrps are required. The spacing in this region is
2
r d 19.5in
= 9.75in
22
I 24in
A,f,,,
smax _ (2)(0.3rin\(60,000 psi) = 46.5in
r-
i
50b, (s0)(16in)
A,fn, (2Xo.3un\(6o,ooopsi)
r- = 56.6in
I o.ts,[f". 0.7 000psi(16in)
t .'.smax=9.75in+savs
max =9in
In resions C (I/, > QV, but V, < +r[J,U*a), the stimrp spacing is based on the derived equation
Afd
for the contribution of the stimrp to shear resistance (tr, = -?).However, the spaciflg, s,
cannot be greater that the minimum spacing requirement computed previously (sû*:9in).
In regions C (V,, > QV" and V, > +r[-f),,.a), the stimrp spacing is based on the derived equation
Afd
for the contribution of the stimrp to shear resistance (V,=). However, the spacing, s,
cannot be greater that the following.
d l9-5in 4.875in
=
-42 =
12in
5(max A,f,, _ (2)(o.3un\(6o,ooo psi)

50b,, (50X16tz)
= 46.5in
I (2)(0.3 1,in'z )(60, 000 psi)

= 56.6in
I
i_ 0.7 0.7 3,000psi(l6in)

f:b_
.'.smax= 4.875in+sav/ s max =4in

I
I
I
t-
At the critical section where V,, is I24.3kips and the corresponding value of Z" is l32kips, the
required spacing of the stimrps is given by reananging this equation and solving for s.
I
I
I
t:
I
148
L
cvB 482 BMS
T/
Afd
t'r .tf
-
't .s
A,,f,,d (2X0.31in2160ksi)(l9.5ir)
^_
--
/ =s=5.49in>s-rnax = 4.87Sin
I32kips
The following table tabulates the total shear strength of the beam for different spacing. Since a
spacing of 4.875in is required at the critical section, the table starts with s=4in, Also, since the
maximum spacing for regions requiring minimum stimrps is 9in, there is no need to calculate
shear strengths for spacing greater thangin. Also shown in the table is the distance from the face
of the support corresponding to the location where that spacing may be started and still ensuring
that V, is greater than V,,.
Recall that maximum spacing must be satisfied regardless of strength. Therefore, s.u":4in must
be satisfied along entire region marked "Do' in the graph above to Yu:77kips. Thus, the
maximum spacing is 4in from the critical section to a distance beyond region "D". The location
from the support corresponding to this location is:
(l44.5kios
- 77 kios\(l2}in\
-l^=4=65.lin
" l44.5kips -2\kips
Similarly, the maximum spacing for regions "C" and "8" (minimum stimrps requirements
cannot be exceeded (s-u*:9ln).
Distance from face of support where a specific spacing can be started
s v, Vu=S(V.+Vr) Distance From Face of Support Min. spacing is
(in) (kips) (kips) (in)
4 l8l t62 -16.4 4
5 t45 134 9.8 4
6 t2t 116 2t.3 4
7 104 103 39.8 4
8 9t 94 49.2 4
9 81 86 56.4 4
Using the table above, and considering that the maximum spacing is 4"o.c. up to 65.11z and then
9in from that point, the stimrp layout is worked out as shown in the fgure below.
r49
I CYE 482 BMS
t- #5 Stirrups, #Bottom Bars

Typical (4)-#8
r .
t- n a
N o\
l Fl
t-
i .l
r
I

tn a (18) @4" (s) @e"
Fl
?t
72" 45"
120,,
Final Stirrup Lavout
Sketch a diagram of the design shear strength (QZr) plotted against the design shear demand (Zr).
Shear Strenqth Plot
L75
r44.5 162.O
I
\- 75" 45
\ --l
r25
\ \z
-l
100
-. \
L 86.0
-
75 \
l
50 * Demand I \ \
\
\ \
t- 25
I
0
,)
I
19.5"
t Critical 20/
-25 Section
I
I
t- 0t2 3 4s678910
I
Location (ftl
,
L
Design Shear Strength versus Desisn Shear Demand
r
I
L-
I
150
L
!..r.<-IZ
cvE,482 BMS
Chapter 7
Doubly Reinforced
Beams
151
cvB 482 BMS
General Discussion about Doubl) Reinforced Beams
As was seen in the discussion pertaining to continuous systems, it is common to have

longitudinal reinforcement in both the top and bottom of beam. The top reinforcement is used to
resist tension in the top of the beam when the beam is subjected to negative moment, and the
bottom reinforcement is used to resist tension in the bottom of the beam when the beam is
subjected to positive moment.
Although it has not been discussed in detail up to this point, it has been suggested that the
longitudinal reinforcement must extend past the theoretical cut-off points in order to develop the
yield stress of the reinforcing bars. This usually results in a cross-section that contains both top
and bottom and steel. This type of beam cross-section is referred to as a doubly-reinforced beam.
The figure below illustrates such a beam.
b Top Bars
(Neg.Moment)
Tie

Stirrups
Bottom Bars
(Pos. Moment)
Figure 1. Typical Cross Section of Doubly Reinforced Beams
'l'he top and bottom bars will be in either compression or tension

depending on the
direction of the moment. For example, when the moment is positive, the bottom bars will be in
tension and the top bars will be in compression. The compressive force resisted by the top
reinforcing bars will contribute to the total compressive force used to bring the tensile force in
the bottom of the beam in to equilibrium. In other words, the total compressive force acting on
the section will be the sum of the compressive forces resisted by the concrete in the compression
zone plus the compressive force resisted by the steel in the compression zone. If the tension steel
has yielded, then the total tensile force able to be generated is A. (assuming an elastic-
perfectly-plastic stress-strain relationship). Therefore, the total compressive force resisted by the
concrete is reduced by an amount equal to the force in the compression bars (4.f.). Therefore,
the volume of the equivalent stress block must be reduced to accommodate the decreased
concrete compressive force. The volume of the equivalent compressive stress block is reduced by
decreasing the value of "a" (f.:0.85f. and b* do not change). The reduced value of "ao'increases
the moment arm between the resultant concrete compressive force and the tensile force, thereby
t52
l'-
CYE 482 BMS
r increasing the moment capacity. Thus, the total flexural strength of the beam is increased, albeit
usually very little, by the presence of the compression bars
r Additionally, the presence of compression bars improves the ductility of the beam. As
can be seen in the figure below, not only is the overall flexural strength of the beam increased,
the magnitude of deflection that a doubly-reinforced beam can resist before failure also
t- increases. Since the presence of the compression bars maintain load resistance prior to the onset
of the concrete crushing in the compression zone, the load will not drop off suddenly as it does
with a singly-reinforced beam. That is, the compression bars tend to reduce the contribution of
t- concrete towards balancing the force in the tension bars; hence, the strength does not drop
suddenly when the concrete crushes as the compression bars maintain the load resistance.
I
t
t$ Note: The capacity and stffiess (EI) are

o Concrete crushes increased due to the presence of
J additional bars in the compression zone,
i.e., doubly reinrced beams. The
$ingly reinforced overall ductility is also improved.
Doubly reinforced Deflection

Figure 2. Representative Load-Deflection Responses of Singly and Doubly Reinforced Beams
The figure below shows the propped cantilever beam discussed in class notes pertaining
to continuous systems. Up to this point, the cross-section shown in Section A-A has been
analyzed by ignoring the compression steel and calculating the moment capacity only
considering the tension steel. The focus of this chapter is on how to analyze and design
reinforced concrete beams considering all of the steel (i.e., tension and compression bars) located
in a particular cross-section.
A
t Negative (top) Steel

Positive (bottom) Steel
t A
Shear Reinf.
t Not Shown
I
L Section A-A
I
Figure 3. Doubly Reinforced Sections
L 153
L
CVE 482 BMS
ANALYSIS OF DOUBLY REINFORCED R.C. BEAMS
Example A doubly reinforced beam is shown below. Compute the nominal and design moment
capacity of this beam. Use f. : 5,000 psi and Grade 60 reinforcement. Assume thai the top of
the beam is in compression, i.e., the positive moment capacity is being computed.
t-ll
-
0.003 0.85 f"
I .<-----{
2No.8
gs,
a .-; ---f ls' C
S,
<-J
I
,d= Y, Y,
3
I No. 10
oaa *fr, s2
aaa *fr', s1
I 14"*l distance
C
Strain Stresses Forces

t.. : strain in compression bars
y1:26+0.5+1.2712:27.135 (Note: 1.2712 is the radius of No. 10 bar)
y z = 26-0.5 - 1.27 I 2:24.865
0.003 :-.
est .
.
C
0.003(y, - c)
sl =
, !,_c c
0.003 er2 0.003(y -c)
t12
, ),._ c c
0.003 _ ",
t"'=
0.003(c - d') where d' = 3u
c' c-d" c
I=4.{= A,E,, ifesy<e
where er:/E, : 60129000 : 0.0022
=Afsy if esy>e
C.' : A.'(t' - O.gS f.), where -0.85f" accounts for displaced concrete around the compression
bars. Note that this equation is valid as long as c ) 3"; otherwise, these bars will be in tension
and C.' is computed similar to Tr.
C: 0.85 f. ab = 0.85 f. Fr c b
154
,.#
CYE 482 BMS
For the conect value of depth of neutral axis (c), equilibrium of horizontal forces (i.e., C,', C,
T51, nd T.z) is satisfied. Select different values of c until equilibrium of horizontal forces is
reached within a reasonable accuracy. Typically, initially guess c = Il4 d: ll4 x26: 6.5"
fr.r f.,:A*:
c (in.) a (in.) st ts2 ts' f"r (ksi) f"2 (ksi) f",(ksi) T"r (kips) T"z (kips) C",(kips) C (kips) Tsr+Tsz C+C",
6.5 5.2 0.00952 0.00848 0.00162 60 60i 46.84( 304.8 304.8 67.3019 309.4 609.6 376.7019
12 9.6 0.00378 4.00322 0.00225 60 60 ..4, 0 304.8 304.8 88.085 571.2 609.6 659.285
10 8 0.00514 0.00446 4.0021 60 60 /60 304.8 304.8 88.085 476 609.6 564.085
11 8.8 0.0044 0.00378 0.00218 60 60, 60 304.8 304.8 88.085 523.6 609.6 611.685
10.9562 8.765 0.00443 0.00381 0.00218 60 601 60 304.8 304.8 88.085 521.515 609.6 609.6001
+" nA),L j t o.*" f 'g
Therefore, c: 10.9562"
t :tsr : 0.00443 > 0.004; so ACI 10.3.5 is met
Minimum Steel:
This requirement is checked for tension bars.
Asrn -max.*? bd and

(':sro
'[ (,
-f'
max
' [ 60,000 (t4x26)
"r(t ' and "o ,r4 x 26)l) = r.29 in:
60,000
Provided A.: 8x 1.27 :10.16 in.2 ) A.n.in o.k. Check only the area
of tension bars.
Sum the moments about the mid-depth.
Mn: C (15 - al2) + C,,(15 - d') + T,r (yr-15) +Ts2 (y2-15):
s2t.s (ts-8.7s12) + 88.1 (rs-3)+304.8 (27.r3s-rs)+304.8(24.865-15): 13,300k-in.
The beam is in transition zone since 0.004<et<0.005
= 0.65* (t,
Q
:0
- o.oo2)
: 0.853 (13300)
t?): =0.65+( 0.00443- 0.002 )[?)=0853
Mu Mn 11,338 k -rn.
Note: The beam will not satisfy ACI ductility requirements (ACI 10.3.5) without the
compression bars!
155
-..3'.!!l-
cvB 482 BMS
Chapter 8

Columns
ls6
CVE 482 BMS
General Discussion About Reinforced Concrete Columns
A number of different types of columns are shown in Figure 1. Square or rectangular

columns and circular columns are more common although composite columns have also been
used. The focus in this chapter.is on the first two cases. Tied columns may be square,
rectangular, or circular. The longitudinal bars are held in position by separate Lateralties (12" to
24" spacing is common in non-seismic regions). Spirally reinforced columns are usually square
or circular. The longitudinal bars are afianged around a circle, and are "wrapped" by a
continuously, closely spaced spiral.
Steel
tubing
irfill
pipe
ngitudinal Ties
ars Spiral
(a) Tied Column (b) Spi rally-Reinf orced

(c) Composite Columns
Column
Figure 1. Types of Reinforced Concrete Columns
As seen from a representative load versus longitudinal strain (see Figure 2), the spirals
add little to the strength prior to reaching the "yield point". However, spirals improve the
ductility. The behavior of tied columns up to the "yield point" is similar to that for spirally
reinforced columns, but tied columns do not have too much ductility. For this reason, reduction
factors are different for the two types of columns.
Heavy
Spiralcolumn
shellspalls
ACI spiral
Light spiral
E
(l Failure of columns
o
J tied or with very
light spirals
Longitudinal strain (shortening)
157
CVE 482 BMS
Figure 2. Behavior of Spirally Reinforced and Tied Columns
The focus of this course is on short columns. A column is short (i.e., buckling does not
control and capacity is determined by the cross-sectional strength) if:
o For non-sway (braced) frames (columns in single curvature): klu/r < 34-12(MtlM2)
o For sway (unbraced) frames (columns in double curvature): klulr < 22
where
klu/r : slendemess ratio;
k: effective length factor;
lu: unbraced length;
r: radius of gyration :
E
Mr : smallest factored end moment (+ for single curvature; - for double curvature);
M2 : largest factored end moment (always +).
For non-sway frames, use k :l unless analysis justifies a lower value. For sway frames k > I
and the value is found from a graph in the code, or from analysis.
Axial Behavior of Reinforced Concrete Short Columns
Pn : Po : Nominal pure axial load capacity

Pn: A. (&- 0.85f") + 0.85f.4s b
1"
where A. : total area of steel 7
A* (gross sectional area) : bh

h
-l
Note that columns are subjected to axial load as well l-
as bending moment. Based on the free-body diagrams shown in Figure 3, the following
equations of equilibrium can be written.
)F:o; P-C,'-C+T.:g
IM t.nrion bars : 0 M+P(d-h/2)-C,' (d-d') -C(d-a/z) :0
It is important to know where the axial load is acting. In the above equations, it has been
assumed that the axial load is at the centroid of the cross section. However, the axial load is
typically assumed to be at a point called plastic centroid. By definition, plastic centroid is the
center of resistance in a column failing under uniform strain condition.
The plastic centroid is computed by summing moments of forces. If the section is symmetrically
reinforced and is 0.85f' c
symmetrical, the plastic and
geometric centroids coincide.
-t----t-- --'-- - t- @$""-".."" fsy=f
Po
(Noe: In his figure, Po is
shown al plastic centroid.) +-- * -t-- {-- t- *-@**f sy=f
158
CVE 482 BMS
M
P
A A
b
Section A-A
Iterate until
)r = o p-C-C.,+f,=Q h = Depth
Where
a
T"=AJ"
C=0.85f'"ab
C.' = A"'(f.'-0.85f'") ?II .85f ',
t
f. f' (:
M-P (d-y-)-C(+ a/2)-C. (d-d)= 0
M= P(d-y) + C(d-al2)+C.,(d-d')
Ts
*
I
d
Figure 3. Free-Body Diagram Showing Applied Forces and Internal Forces and Stresses
159
t-
CVE 482 BMS
r Strength of R.C. Columns Strength, behavior, and analysis of columns are similar to those for
beams. The main difference is the presence of axial load as another variable. For a given
column section, flexural strength depends on the amount of axial load. Knowing the value of
t- axial load, the moment strength can be computed based on basic principles. The complete
variation of moment strength as a function of axial load is illustrated in a curve called interaction
diagram, which is also called P-M diagram. To generate the diagram, it is necessary to assume
t- the location of axial load, which is normally assumed to be at the plastic centroid. A
representative curve is shown below. Note that the slope of any line from the origin to a point on
t- the P-M diagram is the inverse of the eccentricity from the plastic centroid, i.e., M:Pe or P/M :
I Ile.
axial
|,-
t loatl capacity
P Demands
lle
I
UF;SrF
Capacity
.s C'cnrrcsson
X *ri1rrc
Demand Balanced failure
r lbL *
'Ic11son
iirirru
Pure nontent
capacity
Mo
M (Moment)
I
Figure 4.Typical Interaction Diagram (P-M Diagram)
i
A number of points on this diagram are critical.
Po: Pure axial load capacity

Mo : Flexural strength without any axial load, i.e., strength as if the column were
I a beam.
t- P and Mu:Axial load and moment at balanced point. At balanced point, the
concrete reaches its usable strain of 0.003 when the extreme tension bars yield.
I
I This point is somewhat similar to balanced failure for beams. At balanced point,
t- the largest moment is achieved. Above and below balanced point, the moments
I
are less than Mu. Below the balanced point, as the axial load is increased the
I
moment capacity is increased. The reverse is observed for points above the
t- balanced point.
I
t- 160
!
i
L
CVE. 482 BMS
The combination of axial load and moment above the balanced point leads to a
"compression failure." That is, the concrete reaches its usable strain of 0.003 before the extreme
fiber tension bars yield. On the other hand, the reverse is true for all the points below the
balanced point, i.e. the concrete reaches usable strain of 0.003 after the extreme tension bars
have yielded. This type of failure is called "tension failure". Representative strain distributions
are sketched in Figure 5 for tension controlled or compression-controlled columns, i.e.
corresponding to tension failure or compression failure, respectively. Therefore, the depth of the
neutral axis for points below the balancd point is less than that foi balanced point. The reverse
is true for points above the balanced point.
Above balanced point
@ balanced point t" = o.oo3
t v
t.( cb
= Depth of N.A.
co
t.)t,
@ balanced failure
Below balanced point
Figure 5. Representative Strain Distributions for R.C. Columns
The interaction diagram is basically the contour of the flexural capacity as a function of
axial load. Hence, if the applied axial load and moment (P, M) falls exactly on the P-M diagram,
we have an optimum design, i.e. the capacity is exactly equal to the demands. If the demands are
inside the interaction diagram, the column will resist the demands, and vice versa. The more the
applied P and M are inside the interaction diagram, the more overdesigned the column is.
Note that columns become less ductile as the level of axial load is increased. The strain
in the extreme tension bars also becomes less when the axial load becomes larger. Therefore,
nominal strengths are reduced more for smaller strains.
161
r
CVE 482 BMS
t- CONSTRUCTION OF P.M DIAGRAM FOR R.C. COLUMNS
Example Consffuct the interaction diagram for the column shown below. As a minimum compute
Po , (Mu , Pu ), Mo , two points above the balanced point, two points below the balanced point, and
t- (Mro , To ). f.:4,000 psi and Grade 60 reinforcement.
t o O O P5"
3 No. 10
t- V/ith the shown direction of
i
Ax IS of Bending moment, the top face will be
20" in compression and the
t-
bottom face will be in tension.
I
3 No. 11
o o o
\7 fr..s"
20"
Compute the location of plastic centroid

0" g5f'"
o o a
t' s t'v j"
p r'

0
a o o -EI <-""".J
c.
Pu:C*C.,*C.:
0.85f.4s + A,(fv- 0.85f.) + A,'(fr- 0.85f"):
0.85x4x400 + 4.68(60 - 0.85x4) + 3.81(60 - 0.85x4) : 1360 + 265 +216: 1841 kips
P": 1.841 kips
_ t360(t0) + 265(2.5) + 216(17 .5)

"
,_
1841
= 9.80,,
L. 162
L
CVE 482 BMS
MuJu
tc =0.003 * ffi5f',.
O a o
c a *L s*_
V M
p
r- Y = 9.80"
o o a -L*
V
Note: The axial load is

@ the plastic centroid
er:/E, : 60129000 : 0.002 I
0.003
v
c d-c
0.003 60 I 29000
c:10.357"
c 17.5-c
0.003
(, - d')= it':fv
c
^l
tc --
:
-
:
ffi,t 0.3s7 - 2.s) = o.oo227 > ey
:
C 0.851. ab 0.85(4X0.85x 10.357)(20) 599 kips
:
C.' A,' (f.'- O.gSf (60-0.85x4):216 kips
"): 3.81kips
Tr: A, f':4.68 (60):281
IF*:0; P6+Tr-C-Cr' :0i P6: 533 kips
I :
( rM aho,r rension bars 0i M6 + P6 (9.s-2.5) - c,' (20-2-5-2.5) - c.I20-2.5-(0.8sx r0.357)l2l: 0
M6:7,182 k-in.
Note: The calculations were completed
(Mu, Pu): (7182. 533) using an Excel sheet. The values (most
importantly, C, Cr,, and P6) shown here
have been rounded.
r63
r
cvE, 482 BMS
t- M"
c.
(,c =0.003 *.*sf'-
t- a o o
fr. +c.,
+--
c tr
I &ll
k
r
!
i
g"
!'- T
I
o o o
0.003 o'oo3("
e c-d' = -2.s)
c c
0.003 _ q e = 0.003 (+)=ooo,[i_')
c d-c' s
C:0.85f. ab:0.85f" (rc) b

C.' : A,' (f.'- 0.85fl.)
Tr: A, f,
Note: If erce, fr: trE, If er'<e, fr' : tr'E,
If e,)e, f, : fv If er')e, f'' : ft
c C ts' f. c. ts f. T. C*C"
4.5 260 0.00133 38.7 134 0.0087 60 28r 394
J 173 0.0005 14.5 42.3 0.015 60 281 216
3.5 202 0.0009 24.9 81.9 0.0r2 60 281 284
3.48 201 0.00084 24.5 80.4 0.012 60 281 281 (o.k.)
Note: A good initial guessr c is about 0.25d
EM abouttensionbars: 0 ; Mo - Cl20-2.5-(0.85x3.48)l2l- C'' (20-2.51.5):0;
(
M":4"4i8 k-in -L
Mrn.Tn p^ru tyrnrx.
I I
I
t. T.' : A,'& :229 kiqs

T.: A, :281 kips
I IF*:0; To:229+281:510kips y = 9.8"
I
I- T
( r*aboutension bu.. : o
f
I
L- Mro * T'' (20-2.5-2.5)-:1"(9.8-2.5):0 , Mto:288 k-in.

Note: The axial load is
(Mrq. Ts): (288"510)
@ the plastic centroid
t- r64
f
i
fJ
{
CVE 482 BMS
Two points below balanced point
Select 3.48"<c<1O.3"where 3.48" is the depth of the neutral axis for Mo and 10.3" is the depth
of the neutral axis for the balanced point.
(a) Choose c: 6"
e
rz's-c) tt't-u fr: f;:
= o.oorl
" = 0.0031
I c ) ( 6 )I = 0.00575 > -)' Therefore, 60 ksi
0'003 0'003
, . = (c - 2.5\= (6 - z.s\= 0.00175 < e Therefore, fr' : t.'Er: 50.8 ksi
'c6v
C : 0.85(4)(0.8sx6)(20) : 347 kips
T,:4.68 (60):281 kips
C,' : 3.81 (50.8 - 0.85x4) : 180 kips
I'F x :0; P+281-347-180:0; P:246 kips
: 0
(tt about tension bars
M + P (9.8-2.s) - C"' (20-2.s-2.s) - C 120-2.5-0.5x (0.8s)(6)l : 0; M:6,092 k-in

(.6092.246)
(b) Choose c: 4.5"
17.5-c ( n .s- 4.51

=0 003
c
0.003
t4.J = 0.0087 > e v Therefore, f.: f;: 60 ksi
Therefore, f.. : t.. E, : 38.7 ksi

C : 0.85(4)(0.8sx4.5)(20) : 260 kips
T.:4.68 (60) :281 kips
C... = 3.81 (38.7 - 0.85x4): 134 kips
IF, = 0; P+281-134-260:0; P: 114 kips

about rension bars
: 0
e*
M + P (9.8-2.5) -C",(20-2.5-2.5)-C120-2.5-0.5x (0.85X4.5)l:0; M:5,240k-in.
(5240" rr4)
165
t- x
CVE 482 BMS
t- Two points above balanced point
10.3"
I Select c >
c:
where 10.3" is the depth of the neutral axis for the balanced point.
,t choose 15"
I es = 0.003
17.5-c
= 0.003
17.5-
= 0.0005 < ev Therefore, fr: . E, : 14.5 ksi
c 15
r-
i
,",'r'= W (c-2.5)- 9S1rs -2.5)= 0.0025> e.v Therefore, f.': fy:60 ksi
c 15
f- Note that for axial loads above the balanced point, compression bays may yield but not the
I
tension bars
C : 0.85(4X0.85x
15X20) 867 kips :
t
T':4.68 (14.5): 67.9 kips
:
C,' 3.81 (60 - 0.85x4) :216 kips
IF* : 0; P+67.9-216-867:0; P : 1015 kips
y'r*abour rension bars

: 0
M + P (9.8-2.5) - C,' (20-2.s-2.s) - C 120-2.s-0.5 x (0.8s)( 1 s)l : 0; M: 5,473 k-in.
(s473.101 s)
(b) choose c: !2"

6
l7'5-cl
e =0.0031 =0.0(ry:1Zl=0.00r38<e
-Y Therefore, f,=r,E,: 39.9 ksi
" ( c ) [ 12 )
0'9E1tz
t =9S k-2.5)=
,.,sc12Y -2.5)=0.0024>e, Therefore, f,,: :60 ksi
:
C 0.85(4X0.Ssx 12)(20): 694 kips
:
Ts 4.68 (39.9) :187 kips
:
C,' 3.81 (60 - 0.85x4) :216 kips
>F x : 0; P+187-216494:0; P :723 kips
abouttensionbars:0
I
i
Gt
l-
M + P (9. 8-2.5) - Cg (20-z.s-2.s) - C 20-2.s-0.5 x (0. 8s)( 1 2)l : 0; M:6,561 k-in.
I
(.6.s61.723\
I
L
I
L t66
I
L
I
CVE 482 BMS
The same procedure may be followed to find additional points on the P-M diagram, and hence
the complete interaction diagram.
to
2000
1700
1400
rq\
6
CL
11 00
l
800 G.\
T'
(
o
G
500 :-', t,(
'=
200
P)
tv,
-100
/\\o
-400
" pure lers io
-700
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000
Moment (k-in.)
Theoretical (Nominal) P-M Diagram

Y< \ u 5s5
fu + e-
hov h
r67
r
I
cvB 482 BMS

Reduction Factors for Columns
Q -0.7s+(s,-0.002)50
l5
Q -0.t5+0.15 cld, 3

0.90
0.75
L SF!RL 2s0
OTHR Q -0.65+(e, -0.002) 3
0.65
I 5
Q -0.6s+0.2s cld, 3
Com Transition Tension

Controlled ' Controlled
.002 c-
(rt- 005
c/d,=g.699 c/d'=$.375
The maximum axial load is limited to:
P
I n,max = 0.85dP
I
Spirally reinforced columns: - 0.35[0 .85f ', Ar + A,(f, -0.85/', )] ACr 10.36.1
where Q - 0.75
P,,,û^ = 0'800P,
ried columns: - 0.800[0 .Bs.f '" Ar+ A,(f, -0.s5/'")] ACr 10.36.2
where Q - 0.65
These requirements realize that columns will always have some eccentricity, and axial loads
cannot be applied exactly at the plastic centroid, i.e., columns must be designed for some
minimum eccentricity. Therefore, the pure axial load capacity of a column (Po) cannot be
achieved in reality, and ACI code lowers the pure axial load capacity to reflect that columns
cannot be subjected to a pure axial load.
The same reduction factors (Q) are applied to the axial load and moment to obtain the design P-M
diagram from the theoretical P-M diagram.
168
CVE 482 BMS
Theoretical Strain 0 Design

Mn Pn t Factor M, P,
288 -s l0 0.900 2s9 -459
4418 0 0.012 0.900 3976 0
s240 rr4 0.0087 0.900 4716 r02
6092 246 0.00575 0.900 s483 222
7182 s33 0.002069 0.656 4709 3s0
6s6r 723 0.00r38 0.650 4264 470
5473 1015 0.0005 0.650 3557 660
0 1841 very small 0.650 0 I196
P,,
2000
1800 Theoretical P-M

I
I N P.M
1600
1/ern -j I
T
I
I
r
I
-l
I
1400 sP* ----+-

I
- - - - - -.t-
I
+
I I
l-
I
--t--
I I I
o I I I I
CL I I I
.Y 1200 -t- i- T
I
I ------l
I
I I
tt( lgn*re ihe p-M "-l i*r*m I I
_
o 1 000 +
ab*v* ih ie t ,
+ F- - - - - -.t-
I I I

'= 800 I _L_____ _t
I
I
I
I
I
_t______
I
600 CI.s$pc I
-F--- + t-
I I I
I I I
400 J _t_ L J__----

I I I
I I
I
200 r- - - - - - -'l- -
tt
tt
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000
Moment (k-in.)
r69
r
CVE 482 BMS
r At*ALY*l$ & tH$lcli OF FL*xl"tRAL A{*M*frR$
t/*rsior, $.9
opyright 1995,196.1tCT, l9$8,2*44,2*Q1"2*2,2*At,2*+4,2Sts, z0l!6, r8
r Thl. 3pradsheot
The Becton may hav a
Sahram i. Sh*hrooz, Fh.., f .9., FASI {U*iv*r*ity sf inslltti}
compute. moment3 of neta, flexural o.p.cig, P.il intracton dlagm accordlng to ACI 318-2008
hole. The hole 3 a3sumed to bo symmotdcal wll rspoct !o tt mlnor sxls ot bsndlng.
Autom.llc clculaon crn ba tmed or tta,ln Toal3/Optlnslcilcu;ton,

llcro srcurity hss lo be st Nt fuadiurh {eoe Oponal$ecurity,llcrp Secuity},
t- INPUT T}ATA
l}lp-p-;-!"i.ni1s"."qTp-.|fi*s".fr *#..ilp-h"e"s"
t' f.=
fr=
4.00
00.00
(Concrete compressi\re sfength)
(Relnforcment yield sngth)
29000.00 (Stal modulus of elasticty)
0.0030 (Maximum concrot compressive strain) r\l{r: T ni$ vl#s ii} .0i}3 r}cr /\Ol.
r bw=
h!=
h=
20.00
0.00
?0.t0
(Widlh of wb)
(Width of flange)
(Overall depth)
labolgd Tmsfor
Rscbngular Shp' for defnitbm.
tr= 0.00 (Flange thickness)

hr= 0.00 (Distance from top of ssction b top of hole)
f- h= 0.0
0.0
(Distance from bp of section
(Width of hole)
b bottom of hole)
Manual selec{ion
Stel Layer No. of Bars Br Siz of & 4 Distnce from the top ofthe seclon
1 1t 3.81 2.500
t 2 11 4.68 1?.500
3 0.00 0.000
4 0.00 0.000
5 0.00 0.000
6 0.00 ,000
t 7 0.00 0.000
I 0.00 0.000
lo tb labeld'Dwirtg of Redanguhr Shep"to
I 0.00 0.00 ched( the Ooomfy. Nots: The circlgs n the charl aF
10 0.00 0.t00
@
numbs of be ls bn sntsfsd.
Distanca from top of ec'tion to locetion of Ph = 10-20
ls top of secton n compression? yes (yesorno)
Consider diplad concrte? yes (yee orno) {*1e: lyp+ally. isl}ltetl ic$$r*l i$ n#rl*id*r#.
t P (k)
000
0.00
Input ths valus of applled axlal load &
M (k-in)
0c0
0.0
momentwhlch blng chscl(d.
0.00 0.00 This is the distance to

t 0.o0
000
000
0.00
0.00
0.00
plastic centroid.
OUTPUT
t Gross transformed section properls

1,,=
y,.., *
16692.8?$ {Srsss trarstorflcd m*nt of lnsrtlr}
1c.1000 {*|,nr lf N". mer*umd fr$m remprusssn fi6}
M.. = 7t9.8C8 {trEkin$ ffiome*t il kip-:Fch}
L Cracked transformed section pr*perti*s
t, : 6145,2s6 {tr.cked trsilsfrrmd m#mnt of ir:rii
Ir,, * s.BSge {0$tnr to N,A. msursd fft}m cGmprsain ?ss}
Mament cpacity tasZera AxialLoad

L 3.47G2 f !.^" frff
[4. i 4417.158 lHminl rfirmsl F rlft n
t {$trilgth d.ton factr fr rsr ax*f ltsd}

c.s
M,,= 397s.442 {t*sin mfl!nt eaptetty kinch}
l..
t 170
Lj
cvB 482 BMS
2,000
1,900
G 1,600
g 1,400
1,200
;
JI
1,000 - t {.t
i/
8oo
trx 600
l
*-

I
, I la
200 ta
ar
-t-
a '
0
0 2,000 4,000 6,000 8,000
Moment (kips-in.)
- - Design Theoretical + Demands
17t
r
CVE 482
DESIGN OF COLUMNS
GENERAL
ACI 10.9.1 0.01 < p: A, I Ar< 0.08 where A. : area of longitudinal reinforcement, and
A* : gross area of cross section. The 0.01 limit is intended to avoid yielding under
sustained loads, and to prevent a failure mode similar to that for a plain concrete column.
The 0.08 limit is intended to avoid congestion of longitudinal bars.
ACI 10.8.4 For a column with a larger cross section than that required to resist the
applied loads, a reduced effective area A, not less than ll2 of total area may be used to
determine the minimum reinforcement and design strength.
Column sizes are increased typically in 2" increments
TIED COLUMNS ote: Tied columns may be rectangular or circular so long as the transverse
reinforcement is placed at discrete locations.)
1. ACI 10.9.2- As a minimum, provide 4 longitudinal bars for columns with rectangular
or circular ties, and 3 longitudinal bars for columns with triangular ties.
2. Except for first floors, where column sizes are limited by architectural considerations,
l% < p < 3o/o will give most efficient tied columns.
3. Tied columns should not be less than 8", and preferably not less than 10".
4. ACI 7.10.5.1- Provide No. 3 lateral ties for longitudinal bars No. 10 or smaller, and
No.4lateral ties for longitudinal bars No. 11, No. 14, No. 18, and bundled bars.
Deformed wire or welded wire fabric of equivalent area is allowed.
5. According to ACI 7,10.5.2, vertical spacing of ties

< 16 du ( du: diameter of longitudinal bar)
< 48 dt ( d1: diameter of tie)
( least column dimension
Note: ./inal spacing of ties may be governed by shear requirements, which

The
are similar to those discussed r beams w,ith the exception of the equation used
for V,,.
6. ACI 7.10.5.3- Arrange ties to provide support to every corner and alternate
longitudinal bar. The included angle of the corner of a tie, which provides the support,
must be less than 135 degrees. No bar can be placed farther than6 inches clear on each
side of a laterally supported longitudinal bar. If longitudinal bars are placed around the
perimeter of a circle, a complete circular tie is allowed. Some examples are illustrated.
172
CVE 482
-T-.
u"
(o) (b)
u'
'uT (c) {d) Eu'

-.
.T u"
Note: Detoil {d)or (e)

moy be used,
r35
(e)
mox,
Iu"
-I.u"
>" <"
7. ACI 7.10.5.4- Place the first tie not more than Il2 a tie spacing above the top of
footing or slab in any floor. Extend the ties to not more than ll2 a tie spacing below the
lowest horizontal reinforcement in slab above.
sl2
I
S lab
sl2
s ooting
173
t-
cvB 482
t- SPIRALLY REINFORCED COLUMNS
1. ACI .9.2- Provide a minimum of 6longitudinal bars.

t-
2. Except for first floors, where column sizes are limited by architectural considerations,
2.5% < p < 5% will give most efficient spirally reinforced columns. Note that spirally
t- reinforced columns are intended to resist higher loads; hence, a higher reinforcement
ratio is used for such columns.
t- 3. The diameter of spirally reinforced columns should not be less than 12".
4. ACr 7.10.4-
7.10.4.1The spirals must consist of evenly spaced continuous bar or wire
7.10.4.2 Spirals of not less than 3/8 in. diameter are needed to support
longitudinal bars.
7.10.4.3 1 in. < clear spacing between spirals (so called "pitch of spirals") < 3 in.
Note that the nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate cannot be greater than
314 of the clear spacing.
7.10.4.6 Extend spirals from top of footing or slab in any floor to the level of
lowest horizontal reinforcement in members supported above.
7.10.4.8In columns with capitals, extend capitals to a level at which the diameter
or width of capital is two times that of the column.
Note that it is more practical to extend the spirals through the slab and beam into the next
level.
I
2
t
Slab
D Footing
L
I
ACt 7.10.4.6 ACI 7.10.4.8 ore Practi ca
t-
I
i
L t74
L
cvB 482
5. ACI 10.9.3 Ratio of spiral reinforcement ps (as computed below) has to be larger than
or equal to the value given by
{
Af ,tj.\
Pr:0.45,* -t, f c
yf 'T
where
: Volume of Spiral _n (Dc - d5) ag t\"\

Pt {
vol.rrrr. of c*. 7l ) ,. (
+ D"-' oj*i ,L
,
d.: diameter of spiral;
as: area of spiral :1v14)d2";
s : spacing (pitch) of spiral;
D, : outside diameter of spiral as shown;
Ar: gross area of cross section (nhzl+;
Ach :
cross sectional area measured out-to-out
of transverse reinforcement (D.2/4);
f* : yield strength of spiral reinforcement but

not more than 100,000 psi.; and
f. : concrete compressive strength.
ECONOMICAL CONSIDERATIONS
1. Make all columns the same size, vertically in one stack as well as horizontally in one
story. Moreover, it is best to standardize column location in a uniform pattern in both
directions. Vary the amount of reinforcement and concrete strength to achieve size
uniformity. Such a strategy will reduce the cost of column forms. If size changes are
necessary, they should occur in 2" increments, one side a time. For example,24"x24"
column go to a 24"x22", then22"x22", etc. Gang forming will be possible if one follows
this approach.
2. Square or round columns are the most economical. Use rectangular shapes only when
architectural, structural, or flying form requirements so dictate.
3. For exposed surfaces, chamfer corners to eliminate leakage and produce a better
quality finished-product.
'' For fyt larger than 60,000 psi, lap splices according to ACI 7. 10.4.5(a)
shall not be used.
t75
t-
CVE 482
t- 4. Tied columns are more economical than spiral columns because (a) the weight of
spirals is two or three times as much as the weight of ties in a comparable column, (b) the
cost of spiral steel is about twice the cost of tie steel, (c) bars and machinery suitable for
r main spirals are not found in every fabricating shop; hence, delivery of spirals in small
quantities may be delayed. Only rarely are these penalties overcome by increase in
column capacity (which is about 13.8%) of spiral columns.
t-
5. Use No. 14 and No. 18 steel for longitudinal bars in heavily loaded columns if the
r project requires at least five to ten tons of one size. The larger bars reduce congestion of
I
steel and cost of splicing the bars. However, because a crane is required to place heavy
bars, large bars may increase the total construction cost if only a few heavy bars are
required, or if a crane is not available on the job site for otherreasons. If No. 14 orNo.
t. 18 bars are not viable options, use the largest possible bar sizes for the longitudinal bars.
6. Use high-strength concrete in columns if

the high strength reduces the amount of
I reinforcement required, reduces the size of columns, or allows to use one column size. If
high-strength concrete is utilized, use the same strength in all columns in each story to
avoid mistakes in placing the wrong concrete in different columns.
7. Anange column ties to facilitate concrete placement by minimizing internal ties
8. Keep floor-to-floor heights constant. If changes are necessary, reduce the height in the
upper floors, as it is cheaper to cut off a column form than it is to stretch it.
L.
I
I
t_
L 176
L
CVE 482
DESIGN OF R.C. COLUMNS
Example Design a square column with bars in two faces to resist pu : 390 kips, Mu :220 k-ft, and
Vu : 60 kips (which is uniform along the column height). Use f. : 3,000 psi and Grade 60
reinforcement. Sketch your design.
Try p : I.5Yo ; so Ar: 0.0154, 'Where

A, = total area of longitudinal steel
Pu:0.8 0 [0.85f"Ae+ As (f;-0.85f")]
390:0.8(0.65X0.85(3)As+ 0.015 As(60-0.85x3)l; A, :220 i# or 14.8,'x14.8"
Try a l6"xl6" column
Target A, : Q.Q I J x 16x 16 : 3.84 in.2

Try 6 No. 8 longitudinal bars (3 on each face), which give A, :4.74 in.2 with p : 1.85%. Note
that 3 No. 8 bars fit within 16".
This value of p is larger than the target value of l.5o/o, but it is it is within reasonable range of
lo/o to 3o/o.
Assume No. 3 ties

1.5" clear to ties
3.80 (Concrete compressive strength)
t= 0.0 (Reinforcement yeld strength)

E"= 29000.00 (Sleel modulus of elasticity)
0.003t (Maximum concrete compressive stran) N$t*i "h vlse k .3 r.4J.
b"= 16.00 (Wdth of web)
b,r = 0.0 (Wdth of flange)
h= 16.0 (Overall depth)
!= 0.0 (Flenge lkness)
hr= 0.0$ (Dstance from top of secton to top of hole)
hz= 0.00 (Distance from top of section to bottom of hole)
.{) (Wdihof hole) LrsRbnltr6rafylr{nt I
Manaul setection d be oqt$&d !y th posstt I
Steel Layer No. of Bars Br Size ofA ,\ Distence fromthe top ofthe seciion
1 3 2.37 2.375 'tln. Requred Ara of Tnslo Stcel f th Section tr a Baam lArnd
=
2 3 I 2.37 3.6?5
3 0.00 r.80
4 0.00 .t0
5 0.00 0.00 Stsel rato (Totl area ofsteeUcross reconal areat = t,t5;%
6 0.00 Thb rdo mt not rcd 8% per ACl. but kp betrjenf%
O-BO 3% for optn
7 0.00 .000
I 0.00 .000
o
0.00 _00
t0 0.00 0.0
Distance from top of seclon to location of Pn = 8.0

ls top of section n compression? (yes or no)
Consder displacd concrete? yes (yes or no) Ni*: Typirfly, d:sprrj c$nel* is c*nsidere{i
t77
t-
r- CVE 482
1,000
900
U' 800
o- 700
=
ro 600
( 500
o
J 400
trX 300
200
100
0
0 500 1,000 1,500 2,000 2,500 3,000
Moment (kips-in.)
-- Desig Theor*tical @ ffi*m**:#*
As seen from P-M diagram, this column cannot resist Pu: 390 and Mu :220k-ft.
Try 8 No. 8 bars (4 on each face; note that 4 No. 8 bars fit within 16") that give A. : 6.32 in.2
with P :2.47Yo.
1,200
1,000

o-
800
=
E
o 600
o
J
( 400
'=
200
0
0 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000
Moment (kips-in.)
-- Desig heorstica *r::*r.*s
t78
cvB 482
However, this column is still inadequate. Additional bars cannot be added because pwill exceed
the desirable range of Io/o to 3Yo. Therefore, we need to increase the column size.
Try 18"x18" with p about I.5%. Therefore, ,{,: Q.QlJx18x18 = 4.86 in.2
Try 6 No. 8 (3 bars on each face). As: 4.74 in.2 with p : 1.460/o
3.St (Concrte compressive strength)

lr= 0.00 (Reinforcement yield shength)
Er= (Steel modulus of elasticity)
0.003 (Maximum concrete compressive strain) N$l*: Tfr!* elus is .ili)3 t*f P,ill.
b*= 18.00 Wdth of web)
bk= .0 (Width of flange)
h= 18.0 (Overll depth)
0.00 (Flange thickness)
hr= .r (Dstence from top of section to top of hole)
hz= 0.00 (Distance from top of secton to botlom of hole)
.0 Wdth of hole) tw uankf crlBrm r ru qffi |
Manaul selection 4tecr#dryfl4ogrqrd
..4 I
Steel Layer No. of Bars Bar Sze ot At ,\ Distance from the top ofthe secton
1 3 I 2.37 ?.375 tln, Requlrd Ara of Tenslon sloel f thg gecton 18 . Beam Asrr =
2 2 a 2.37 13.625
3 0.00 0.000
4 0.00 0_000
5 gl r.to {Ttal arra of rtolrcrosi ectonal re}
6
0.00 .000 = 1,16%
0.00 0.00 Thlr r.60 mut no exced 8% Fr ACl, btt l<eep batwnl% to 3% for optin
7 0.00 0.t0s
I 0.00 .0
9 0.00 t.0t0
10 0.00 0.000
Dislance from top of secton to locaton of Pn =

ls top of seclon n compression? (yes or no)
Consder displaced concrete? yes (yes o no) Nri: ypi.,lly, disl*ed **nfJet* !s $rsidrred.
1,200
,000
U'
o-
-Y 800
E(E
600
o
J

'x 400
200
0
0 500 1,000 1,500 2,000 2,500 3,000 3,500
Moment (kips-in.)
' ' Desig Thsoretical s D*mar:ds
179
r-
cvB 482
This column is inadequate. Increase the amount of steel. Try 14 No. 7 bars (7 No. 7 bars in each
face, which fit within 18"). A, : 8.4 in.2 with p : 2.60/o, which is above the target value of I.5o/o
but within the desirable range of lo/o to 3o/o.
nter data only in the BL|J spaces belaw.

(Concrete compressve strength)
t= s0.00 (Reinforcement yield strength)

E"= 2$000.00 (Steel modulus of elastcty)
0.s30 (Maximum concrete compressive strain) N1sr Thi$ v|.s i$ . *st C1.
b*= 18.0{) (wdth of web)

h= -00 (wdth of flange)
h= 18.0 (Overall depth)
0.00 (Flange thckness)
hr= 0.t (Distance from top of section to top of hole)
hz= 0.00 (Distance from top of section to bottom of hol)
0.80 (Vvdth of hole) nl mnt
Ld/E bbnk d ster B f
pgam' II
Manaul selecton & b be dryited by th
Sleel Layer No. of Bars Bar Size ofA ,\ Distance from th top ofthe sec'ton
1 7 7 4.20 2.313 ilin, Rqulred Ara ol Tension Sbel if th Section i! Bsam (Ashb) =
2 7 7 4.20 15.88
3 0.00 8.0
4 0.00 0.00
5 0.00 t.s0 Steel ratio {Total .ra of roltcroa sstonal arca} = 2.59Yo
6 0.00 B.t0 Thia to mual not oxced 8o per ACl, but kap btwcnl% to 30/6 tot opttt
7 0.00 0.00t
I 0.00 0.00
9 0.00 0.0
l0 0.00 0.000
Distance from top of secton to location of Pn = s_0

ls top of section in compression? ye$ (yes or no)
Consider displaced concrete? yes (yes orno) i Yy:ioally. di*pa*+*i <;+rcr+l$ s rfrder$C.
1,400
1,200
U)
o- 1,000
.Y
E(g 800
o
J 600
(E
'x 400 rtu
240
0
0 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000 6,000
Moment (kips-in.)
Design @ **enru*s
-Thscrmtical
This column is adequate and very efficient as the target design value (Mu: 200 k-ft and Pu : 390
k) is just inside the P-M diagram.
180
cv 482
Transverse reinforcement
N, l,
: 2['.ffi]
v .: 2 (l + 2ooo b' d * qo'ooo ) x rroo 1s(18 - 2.312s)
or)L'lf"
Assumes No.
3 ties and 1.5"
clear to ties
Y":49,549Ib:49.5 kips
I l2Y c : 0.5(0.75) (49.s) : I 8.6 kips
V' > 1/20Vc Therefore, we need to consider shear in addition to the other requirements for tie
spacing.
V':Q(V"+V,); 60:0.75(49.5+V,); V,:30.5kips
4,,[J' d:4 J3000 (1sxls -2.3t2s)= 61865 tb = 6t.86 kips

" b*
d 18-2.3r2s
=a
Q-Atl
Controls
2 2
24"
A,.f,. :7.84"
Since V, < 4 F" u. o S.u* I _(o.r r x 2X6o,ooo) = 14.7,, i Sn,u*
50bu: 50x18
Af (0.11x 2X60,000) _ l? oil
I t.t
-
0.7s,[-fib, 0.75{3,000(18)
Note: Only two legs of the ties are used herein because the
direction of shear is unknown.
Atr'f d I
(0. 11 x 2)60(18 - 2.3 tzs)
Vs sl = = 6.87 "
s 30.5
- Once again, only two legs of the ties have been included.
To provide adequate shear capacity, the ties are to be placed at not larger than 6.87"
Tie spacing requirements (for confinement purposes): 16du : 16(0.875): 14" f c*:rtruli
48dt:48 (3/8): 18"
Least column dimension: 18"
Shear requirements control the final spacing of ties. Therefore, provide No. 3 ties at 6" o.c
181
r
CVE 482
r Sketch of final design
r l_ 19" -l
-l
l-
/
t-
I l'\
t 19"
zo
\f
F
t-
t I
No. 3 ties @ 6" o.c
I 1.5' clear to ties
Note: The cross ties have been provided to satisfy ACI7.10.5.3
t-
t_
I
L
tj
lj 182
Ll
cv,482
Example Select a round spirally reinforce column for an intermediate floor in a flat slab parking
deck. The dead load is 200 kips and live load is 160 kips. Based on analysis of the structure, the
unbalanced design moment (i.e., factored moment) is 147 k-ft. Use l. : 4,000 psi and Gr. 60
reinforcement throughout.
Pu : I .2Ppy+I.6Prt- : I.2x200+1.6x 160 : 496 kips
Try p :3o/o ; so Ar: 0.034, 'Where

A,: total area of longitudinal steel
P,:0.85 Q [0.851" As+ As(&-0.85f")]
496 :0.S5(0.75X0.85(4)A'+0.034s(60-0.S5xa)l; Ae : 513 in2 :1n14)D2; D:l3.9" say 16"

(Beacuse this calculation does not account for the effects of moment, a larger section will
eventually be necessay; hence, W 16" instead of 14".)
Try a 16" round column.
/\
Tarset A.:
" 0.03f L o' l: 6.03 in.2
[4 )
Try 6 No. 9 longitudinal bars, which give A.:6.0 in.2.
4-
tc- 4.t (Concrete compressive strength)
fv= $0.00 (Reinforcement yield strength)
2S000.00 (Steel modulus of elasticity)
^=
c 0.003 (Maximum concrete compressive strain)
= 16.t (Diameter)
ACI requires a minimum of 6 bars
No. of longitudinal bars o
Check to make sure that bars fit.
Size of longitudinal bars I lnput 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 1 1 ,14, or 18
Type of column Spiral Type Tied or Spiral
Clear cover to spiral or tie t.cu
Use at least No. 3 for longitudinal bars No. 10 and smaller.
Size of spiral or tie 3 Use at least No. 4 for longitudinal bars No. 11 and lager.
Do not use larger than No. 6.
p 2e80/.
ffil3i::;fffiH";t:iig.:J,i,ffiliiffi5:
lnput the values of applied axial load & bending moment which are being checked.
P (k) M (k-in)
49.00 1764"0A
0.0t 0"00
0"0 0.0t
0.00 0.00
0.s 0.0t
0.s 0.0
183
l'-
cvB 482
t-
1,200
t- 1 000
rn
o-
l 800
t- E
G 600
o
t- J
t

'*
400
I_ 200
I
0
r
l 0 500 1,000 1,500 2,000 2,500
Moment (kips-in.)
Design { *mands
-Thearetical
As seen from the P-M diagram shown above, the column is under designed and needs to be
enlarged. Try an 18-inch round column.
Tarser A.:
' o.o3l L o') :7 .63 in.2
[4 )
Try 18" column with 6 No. 10 bars, which give A, : 7.62 in.2. Note that these bars result in a
reinforcement ratio (p) of 3%.
Check the capacity of this column.

I
L_
i-
I
I
[-
f
L 184
I
L
I
cvB 482
Hnter data *nly in the BLLJ spacs$ below.
f'"= 4.t (Concrete compressive strength)
fy = 6t.0 (Reinforcement yield strength)
E. = 9000.00 (Steel modulus of elasticity)
rc = t.003* (Maximum concrete compressive strain)
= 1S.00 (Diameter)
No. of longitudinal bars 6 191 requires a minimum of 6 bars
Check to make sure that bars fit.
Sizeof longitudinalbars 10 lnput3, 4,5,6,7, B, g, 10,11, j4,or1g
Type of column $piral Type Tied or Spiral
Clear cover to spiral or tie t.5
Use at least No. 3 for longitudinal bars No. 10 and smaller.
Size of spiral or tie 3 Use at least No. 4 for longitudinal bars No. 11 and lager.
Do not use larger than No. 6.
Percentage of longitudinal steel (not to exceed 8% per ACl,
p Z.gg%
but try to keep between 2.5%lo 5o/ofo optimum columns).
1,400
1,200

o- 1,000
=
E 800

o
J 600

'= 400
200
0
0 500 1,000 1,500 2,000 2,500 3,000 3,500
Moment (kips-in.)
Design @ **s"nmr:ds
-Theoretcl
This column is adequate; the available moment capacity for Pu : 496 kips is about 1990 k-in
(166 k-f, which is about l2o/o above the target moment capacity of 147 k-ft. Therefore, select
this column.
Compute spacing of spiral reinforcement
A_f of Spiral _ n (Dc - ds) a5

Ps
:0.45 (;--= - l)
.*fcl + where ps_ Volume
Volume of Core c 2
yt
Ds S
4
185
r
cvB 482
r dr: diameter of spiral;
as: area of spiral : (nl4)&";
s : spacing (pitch) of spiral;
t- D.: outside diameter of spiral;
Ar: gross area of cross section (nh2l+;
Ach: cross sectional area measured out-to-out of transverse reinforcement (nD"2l4);
f- : yield strength of spiral reinforcement but not more than 100,000 psi.; and
fvt
:
f" concrete compressive strength.
t-
Per ACI 7.10.4.2, diameter of spirals cannot be less than 3/8". Select #3 spirals.
t- ar:0.11in.2
dr:3/8"
With 1.5" cover to spirals, D" : | $-lx 1.5 : 15"
t- A": (ruD"214): (nxl5')14 = 176.72 in.2
A, : (nh2 I 4 : 1x I 82) 14 : 254.47 in.2
A'
rs
o-:0.45( r) ! : 0.45 54'47 - r) 1=
t
A. - ' rr,
0.0132
'176.72 ' 60
: u (Dc - ds) as z (15-318) x0.11

o- ;0.0132_ ;s=2.r7,,
I ,"' , f,xgs)'xs
Per ACI $7.10.4.3, spacing of spirals is between 1" and 3". Therefore, the calculated spacing of
spirals is adequate.
Provide No. 3 spirals at 2"
Sketch of final desien
L
18.00"
L
-
For tr larger than 60,000 psi, lap splices according to ACI 7.10.4.5(a) shall not be used.
L 186
t
cvB 482
A note about placement of longitudinal bars It is not practicable to prescribe the orientation
of bars in round columns when more than four bars are used, and not advisable without rigorous
field inspection when using only 4 bars. For this reason, the spreadsheet has been programmed
based on the bar arrangement giving minimum capacity. The bar patterns that are used in the
spreadsheet program are shown in the following.
38.d
2..
64.f
6 Bars 7 Bars 8 or More Bars
Arrangement of Bars in Spreadsheet Program
If more than 8 bars are to be placed in the section, the spreadsheet simply divides the total area of
longitudinal bars by 8 to obtain an area to be assigned among 8 bars. The bending moment
capacity for sections with more than 8 longitudinal bars will be larger than for sections with only
8 longitudinal bars; however, the difference in capacity will be very small if not negligible
because concrete resist a significant amount of the total column load. Moreover, for 8 or more
bars, the effect of bar orientation is negligible, and an equivalent thin cylinder may be used to
represent sum ofactual bar areas.
187
cvB 482 BMS
Chapter 9
Bond, Anchoruge, and

Development Length
188
l\
CVE 482 BMS
General Discussion Development Length
Flexural capacity of the cantilever beam shown below relies on developing the full yield
strength ofthe reinforcing bars at the support. The bars have to be adequately anchored before t can
be developed. The minimum embedment length inside concrete needed to develop f, is called
"development length".
Reinforcing
bar
Face of
'support
U
4* 4*
3 T=Arf,
ld --+
fy Distribution of stress In bars
Let's look at the free-body diagram of the bar inside the support. Assuming that the bond stress u- is
distributed uniformly along the development length (/), the following equation can be written.
,f, = ndJuu (1)

where
A, : area of steel, f, : yield strength of reinforcing hars, clu : bar diameter, /6 : development
length, an u : average bond strength. Note that the bond stress is distributed along and
around the bar. At the end of the development length the stress in the bar drops to zero, i.e.,
the bar force has been completely transferred to the surrounding concrete.
If the value of is known, the required development length can easily be computed from Eq.
l. For example, if we assume , : SOO psi, development length for a # 9 bar is /o : (1x60)/(
rx 1.128x0.5) : 33.8 inches.
Although the above basic formulation is correct, this approach cannot be used in reality
because bond stress is not actually distributed uniformly, and the value of bond stress is unknown. A
numberof factors influence the magnitude of bond stress, and we have to rely on empirical equations
to calculate the development length. (The older codes used to define the bond stress u-, but recent
codes provide equations for calculating the development length directly.)
189
I
cvE' 482 BMS
t- Development of Deformed Bars in Tension (ACI 318-08 e12.2)
ACI EQ 12-I
t-
,,=(ffi) VV V
c.+K
blr
du> l2in (ACr EQ 12-1)
t-
d.b
I f, = yield strength (psi)

f " = concrete compressive strength (psi)
'
r
I
V, =Bar Location Factor
V"=Coating Factor
V, = Bar Size Factor
t
), = Lighrveight Aggregate Factor
Distance from center of bar to nearest concrete edge
c = smaller of
one-half the center-center spacing of bars being developed
Af
,r lt
Kr. = the transverse reinforcement factor
' lsoosn
A,,. = Total cross-sectional area of all transverse reinforcement having the center-to-center
spacing, s, and a yield strength,fr,.
s = Refer to {. definition.
.40 = Refer to 1,, definition.
z = Number of bars being developed along the splitting plane.
Valid for f.<10,000 psi
Discussion of the transverse reinforcement factor. K

t
ACI allows taking Kt : 0 as a conservative design simplification even if transverse
reinforcement is present. The figure below provides an illustration of the terms described above.
i-
t At.:2AstirrunI Atr: Astirrup Atr: 2Astinup
t_ n=2 n: I n:J
I
I
I
L 190 rt".r4
L
vvt hl \
cvB 482 BMS
Simplified Equations
When:
o Clear spacing of bars being developed or spliced not less than d6.
. Clear cover not less than da.
o And stimrps or ties throughout / not less than the code minimum.
-or-
. Clear spacing of bars being developed or spliced not less than 2db.
o And clear cover not less than da.
Note that the ACI minimum cover to primary reinforcement, stimrps, ties, and spirals is 1.5",
and the clear spacing between bars is the larger of 1 ", bar diameter (d6 ), and 1.33 times the
diameter of coarse aggregate.
,r \F
\{' For #6 bars or smaller /, = 'f,,V,V " du) For #7 bars or larger ,,=(ryyr,
\ Other Cases: "M
3f
,v,v 3f,rlr,V
For #6 bars or smaller r=[ *M " dui For #7 bars or larger ln =
4oM
" d.
Development Length Factors (as given in gACI 12.2.4)
pt:Reinforcement Location Factor

o Horizontal reinforcement so placed that more than 12lz of fresh concrete is cast in the
member below the development length or splice.. . Vt:1.3
. Other reinforcement... ry1:1.0
p.:Coating Factor
o Epoxy-coated bars or wires with cover less than 3d6, or clear spacing less than
6du...V.:1.5
o All other epoxy-coated bars or wires. ..V":I.2
o Uncoated and galvanized reinforcement ... V":1.0
o However, the product, VtV., need not be taken greater than I.7
:Reinforcement Size Factor
o No.6 and smaller bars and deformed wires...Vr:0.8
o No.7 and larger bars...V.:1.0
I:Lightweight Aggregate Concrete Factor

o For normal weight concrete, l": 1. Where lightweight concrete is used, shall not
191
t-
CVE 482 BMS
t' exceed 0.75 unless f.1is specified, for such cases, shall be permitted to be taken as
< 1.0.
t- 6.7 f'"
Excess Reinforcement (ACI 512.2.5)
t-
Development length () as computed from the aforementioned equations can be reduced by
r- Arrequired I Arprovided if reinforcement in a flexural member is in excess of that required by
I
analysis. This reduction is not allowed for cases where anchorage or development for is
specifically required or the member resists earthquake loads.
t-
Notes:
a The simplified equations are conservative and can lead to potentially uneconomical
detailing.
a In no case shall / be taken less than L2 in.
a The transverse reinforcement index, !+, shall not be taken greater than2.5.
db
a In the simplifed equations, the transverse reinforcement index, +,dh is taken equal to
1.5 for "defined" cases. For "other cases

o' c+Ktr
-1.0
dl)
The following figure illustrates the assumptions made when using the simplified equations.
t-
L-
t-
I
I
L t92
L
CVE 482 BMS
Stirrup Spacing No Stimrp
Meets Code Spacing
Minimurn Requirements
q\ o
c.tdb c.tdb
U (J
il
clear clear
b b
(a) (b)
Defined Cases Other Cases

cb*K,, _r. b + Krr
l.-
- I .0
tlb db
Figure 1: Illustration of cases for using simplifed equations for la.
-
Coefficients for lO using simplified equations
The following tables summarize the coefficients for l using the simplified equations.
Derivations of the equations are also provided. Note that the bar location factor, ry,, for 1.0 and
1.3 for bottom bars and top bars, respectively. Furtherm or", 95= 1.5 for the Defined Cases
db
c.+K
and n '' = 1.0 for the "Other" Cases.
dl)
Defined Cases-Bottom Bars
_ -f),v,v" ln= f ,'V,V "

ld
d.b
do- 2il.^[7 2sLJ f.
For #6 bars or smaller v" (
, (60,000x1.0x1.0) , )
"
t,=----------------
25"l,lf:
Ltb=
f;
193
r
cvB 482 BMS
I L -f ,v,v
" )lu= ft'V'V"
d.
d.It 20^J 20i"J
For #7 bars or larger
r-
,
td -
(60,000x1.0x1.0)
I-
qb-
, J, 000d
20xrl f f,'
r
Defined Cases-Top Bars
r
I
'f,V'V" lo= f ,,v,v "

L
-=
d. 2sL,lf;
b
t'-
I For #6 bars or smaller
,
D
^M
(60,000x1.3x1.0) -d , 3,1 20d
td- r- ub-
2sxtl f, f;
!" frv,V frv,V

" lo= " d.
d.b n{v; D

, ^M
(60,000x1.3x1.0) ,
qb-
3,900d
" zoxlrlf; J.
"Other" Cases-Bottom Bars
t.d 3f,V'V" 3f,,v,v

9lo
For #6 bars or smaller
d.t)

=
t*E " d.
l)
(3X60,000x1.0x1.0) 3,
lo= d-
b
sox\[f) f:
ld _3f,,vt,v" 3f ,,ry,v
I
I )lo= LA ",
t- dr- 40hE 4oL,lf,"
t)

,u_ (3x6o,ooox1.ox1.o), _ 4,500dh
t.--Ltb-
t 4o x r,r/l f;
t
t.
I
I
t-
I
t
L 1,94
L
cvB 482 BMS
"Other" Cases-Top Bars
t, 3f,v,v 3.f ,.v,v"

)lu=
For #6 bars or smaller
z-
d *M "
5oh/ f"
db
lo=
(3X60,000x1.3x1.0)
50xl f;
d- -T
4,6g0db
5 _3f,,ttt,V " lo= 3-f,v,v" l

d,- 4oh/7 4oL,lf:
-U-
b

(3X60,000x1.3x1.0) 5.8s0d
lo= du=:--7-z
40x f: ,l f,
Table 1: Coefficients for for Defined Cases of the Simplified Equations for # 6 bars or smaller
1
used as Bottom bars 1.0 or bars ( 1.3) 1.0

#6 Bars or Smaller - Bottom Brs of Defined Cses or
Normal Vei lht Concrete - Not E Normal Wei ht Concrete - Not E poxy-Coatcd
Coefficient Coefficient Coefficient Coefficient Coefficient Coefficient
f" for dn f for d" f for d6 flo for d f, for dr f," for do
3,000 43.82 5.000 33.94 7.000 28.69 3,000 56.96 5.000 44.12 7,000 37.29
3,250 42.10 5,2s4 33.12 7,250 28.19 3.250 54.73 s,250 43.06 7.250 36.64
3.500 40.57 5.500 32.36 7,500 27.71 3.500 52.74 5.500 42.07 7,500 36.03
3,750 39.19 s.750 3l .65 7.750 27.26 3,750 s0.95 5.750 41.15 7,7s0 35.44
4.000 37.95 6,000 30.98 8,000 26.83 4.000 49.33 6,000 40.28 8.000 34.88
4.250 36.81 6.250 30.36 8,2s0 26.42 4.254 47.86 6.250 39.47 8,250 34.3s
4,500 35.78 6.500 29.77 8.500 26.03 4,500 46.51 6.500 38.70 8.s00 33.84
4,750 34.82 6,750 29.21 8,750 25.66 4,75A 45.27 6,750 37.98 8,750 33.35
Development Length is l6=[2,400/SQRT(f")]db Development Length is l:[3,120/SQRT(f")ldb
Table 2: Coefficients for for Defined Cases of the Simplifed Equations for #7 bars or larger
16
used as Bottom bars ( I or bars (tgr:1.3) 1.0

#7 Bars or Bars of Defined Cases
Norml rvei ht Concrete - Not E t Concrete - Not E poxv-Coated
f for d, fl for d f for do fr for d, f for dr f for d6
3,000 54.77 5,000 42.43 7.000 35.86 3,000 71.20 5,000 55.15 7.000 46.61
3.250 52.62 5,250 41.40 7,2s0 3s.23 3.250 68.41 5,2s0 53.83 7.25A 45.80
3.s00 50.71 5.500 40.45 7.500 34.64 3,s00 6s.92 5.500 52.59 7,500 45.03
3,750 48.99 5,750 39.56 7.750 34.08 3,7s0 63.69 5,750 5l .43 7.754 44.30
4.000 47.43 6,000 38.73 8,000 33.s4 4.000 61.66 6,000 50.3s 8,000 43.60
4.250 46.02 6.250 37.95 8,250 33.03 4.2s0 s9.82 6.250 49.33 8,250 42.94
4,s00 44.72 6,500 37.21 8.500 32.54 4,500 58.14 6,500 48.37 8.500 42.30
4.750 43.53 6,750 36.51 8,750 32.0',) 4,750 56.59 6,750 47.47 8,750 41.69
Development Length is I=[3,000/SQRT(f")]db Development Length is 16:[3,900/5QRT(fl")]db
195
I
CVE 482 BMS
nevetonme* Lensth C
Defmedlaes
80.00
6l 70.00
a)

l \ \ --*BottomBars-
EI 60.00 \ I
#6 or Smaller
I -| \ \
.1
l \ \ \ I
\ t{ tt I *BottomBars-
:ll 50.00
\ \ LJ l-{ ].{
HH |.-r
HH H H
#7 or Larger
al
'l 40.00
l-{ H
LI HH H LJ
-FTop Bars-#6
Ll
.)t H tJ H H or Smaller
ol 30.00
QI
#TopBas-#7
20.00 or Larger
()c)00
lrl c) rr t. o v o |f o |f) o |f o ooct
ooooooc)oo<)o900 rflC)no|f
r- l r- O el |. - O l lf) F-otnr-
o|forn
ct l l\
.'i rri c'i cli .f { f, { ,ri vi vi vi \i \t \t \ l-r - - F-
Plot of l coefficients for Defined Cases of the Simplified Equations
Table 3: Coefficients for for "Other" Cases of the Simplified Equations for #6 bars or smaller
16
used as Bottom bars 1 or bars 1.3). r.0

#6 Bars or Smaller - Bottom Bars of "Other" Cases Bars of ttOther" Cases
ht Concrete - Not I Normal Wei ht Concrete - Not I
fc for d" f" for d fl for d6 fc for d6 fl for d f' for d6
3,000 65.73 5.000 50.91 7,000 43.03 3.000 85.44 5.000 66.19 7,000 55.94
3.254 63.1s 5,250 49.68 7.250 42.28 3.250 82.09 5,250 64.s9 7.250 54.96
3,500 0.85 5.500 48.54 7.500 41.5'1 3,500 79.11 5.500 63.11 7.500 54.04
? 750 s8.79 5,750 47.48 7,754 40.89 3.750 76.42 5.750 61.72 7,750 53.1
4.000 56.92 6,000 46.48 8-000 40.25 4,000 74.00 6,000 60.42 8.000 s2.32
4.250 5s.22 6.250 4s.54 8.250 39.63 4,250 71.79 6.2s0 59.20 8.250 51.s3
4.500 53.67 6.500 44.65 8,500 39.05 4.500 69.77 6.500 58.05 8,500 50.76
4,750 52.23 6,750 43.82 8,750 38.49 4,750 67.90 6,750 56.96 8,750 50.03
Development Length is l=[3,600/3QRT(f")]db Development Length is l:[4,680/SQRT(f")]db
Table 4: Coeffcients for for "Other" Cases of the Simplified Equations for #7 bars or larger
l
used as Bottom bars 1.0) or bars ( 1.3 1.0
or - Bottom Bars of or Bars
Normal Weight Concrete - Not Epory-Coated
r" for d f for d fc for d f for d6 fl for do fc for d6
3.000 82-16 5,000 63.64 7,000 53.79 3.000 106.81 5,000 82.73 7,000 69.92
3,250 78.94 5,2s0 62.11 7.254 52.85 3,250 t02.62 5,2s0 80.74 7.250 68.70
3,500 76.06 5.500 60.68 7,500 s1.96 3,500 98.88 5.500 78.88 7,500 67.55
3.750 73.48 5,750 s9.34 7,750 51.12 3.7s0 95.53 s,750 77.t5 7,750 66.4s
4.000 71.15 6,000 58.09 8.000 50.31 4,000 92.50 6,000 75.52 8.000 65.40
4.250 69.03 6.250 s6.92 8,250 49.54 4,250 89.73 6.250 74.00 8,250 64.41
4.s00 67.08 ,500 55.82 8,s00 48.81 4.500 87.21 6.500 72.56 8,500 63.45
4,750 65.29 6,'150 54.77 8,750 48.1 I 4,750 84.88 6,750 71.20 8,750 62.54
Development Length is 16=[4,500/SQRT(f")]db Development Length is 1=[5,850/SQRT(f")]db
t96
cvE 482 BMS
nevetonment Lensth C
tbrleascs
110.00
100.00
\ L
I
\ \ L
90.00
I
\ \ Bottom
80.00
St I # or
\
\ l \ \ \
70.00
t I
*Bottom
\ Hh I H t{ H #7 or Larger
60.00
H H HHH 4Top Bars-#6
50.00
or Smaller
40.00
*Top Bars-#7
30.00 or Larger
o
c) o o c)
c) u o oo
u
ct c) rn o o c)
c) in o o o o o o ct c) o
c> f c) n o rn o r o rr
oc(to
o|/ou
o tn F ct l ln t- o la l- c) (\ vl F- c) (\ n - o^clvt\
cri c.i cri ri + + { +,.t'ri vi vi \t \t \d \i F:
Concrete Comprcssive Strength (psi)
Plot of l coefficients for "Other" Cases of the Simplified Equations

Comparison of Development Lengths using Simplified or Detailed Expressions
For most practical cases, the simplified expressions for development length will result in
appreciably larger development lengths compared to the development lengths computed using
the detailed expression. As discussed previously, the assumption in the Simplified Expressions is
that the transverse reinforcement index, K, is taken as either 1.5 (for the Defined Cases) or 1.0
(for the "Other" cases). Since the limit on the transverse reinforcement ratio 1c't,K" <2.5) is
db
2.5, the Simplified Expressions are conservative when bar spacing and transverse reinforcement
can be detailed such that the ratio is greater than 1.5.
Additionally, the smallest value that can be obtained for the transverse reinforcement ratio is 1.0.
This is because the lowest the reinforcement index (K) can be is zero, and that due to limitations
on bar spacing (ACI 7.6.1) and minimum clear cover requirements (ACI 7 .7), the ratio of c5/d6 is
co*.K"
db ='o!o
at a minimum one. Thus, when Kr. is taken as zeo,
db =!9=1.0.
Thus, the
1.0
simplified equations for the "Other Cases" yield the smallest possible value for the transverse
reinforcement ratio which produced the largest possible computed development length. The
following graph illustrates this observation, where plots of development length coefficients are
shown assuming/'":3,000psi, Gr. 60 steel, and #6 bars or smaller are used as bottom bars. The
general observation in the plot is consistent with other assumed combinations of f'",fn, andbar
size.
t97
CVE 482 BMS
Oevelonment Leneth
Defined Cases
80
70
J
d
E'l gl
uo
b{ rl \ \
6l El so
El El .,
l 'l
EI EI' f'c=3,000psi
ul zo --# Detailed Equation
l Gr.60 Steel
Simplified-Defined Case
10 #6 Bars or Smaller
Bottom Bars - Simplified-Other Cases
-
0
1.00 L.25 r.50 r.75 2.OO 2.25 2.50
Transverse Reinforcement Index

Comparison of development length coefficients (simplified versus Detailed Expressions)
Development of Deformed Bars and Deformed Wire in Compression (ACI
318-08 912.3)
The basic development length is computed from the following equation.
dof,
'I I
0.02
1,,,. = larger of ,1. )
(o ooor )4
where the constant 0.0003 is in units of inz I lb
A
The value obtained from this expression may be modified by
i"
Additionally, the value obtained from the above expression may be multiplied by 0.75 if one of
the two following criteria are satisfied.
I . Ifthe bar being developed is enclosed by spirals that are not less than 1/ in diameter and
not more fhan 4 in pitch (spacing), or
2. Within #4 ties in conformance with ACI 7.10.5 and spaced at no more than 4 in on
center.
198
CV,482 BMS
Thus, the minimum development length for a bar in compression is (given that the above criteria
is satisfed)
(o7sxoo2,(ffi)(*)
In,=latger of
(o.7sxo.oo o3)d;,(*)
where the constant 0.0003 is in units of in2 I lb
Bundled Bars IACI 318-08 612.4 and 87.6.6)
3.4 s
(a) (b) (c)
Figure 2: Traditional configurations of bundled bars (a) L-shaped 3-bar bundle, (b) triangular-
shape 3-barbundle, and (c) square 4-bar bundle.
Sometimes, it is necessary to provide bundled bars when relatively large areas of reinforcing
steel are required in limited space. In cases of large girders or columns, it is advantageous to
bundle bars to provide for improved placement of concrete around and between bundles of bars.
Figure 2 shows some traditional configurations of bundled bar groups.
ACr 318-08 67.6.6
o Bundles are limited to four bars.

o Buncllecl hars mrst be enclosecl within stimrps or ties.
o For beams, the diameter of the individual bars in a bundle is limited to #11 bars.
o The terminations of an individual bars in a bundled group must be staggered and be
spaced at a distance of 40da or greater.
. Spacing and cover factors determined for use in the calculation of development must be
based on the diameter of an equivalent bar area equal the total area of the bundled bar
group.
ACr 318-08 $12.4
The development length of bundled bar groups must be increased relative to the development
length of individual reinforcing bars. This is due to the lack of a defined core of concrete around
each bar thereby, increasing the probability of concrete splitting along the length of the bar. ACI
requires the following development lengths for bundled bars.
l. For 3-bar bundles, la6:r.2016 calculated for an individual bar diameter
r99
t-
CVE 482 BMS
I 2. For 4-bar bundles, laa:I.33la calculated for an individual bar diameter.
Where, /au: the development length of the bundled bar group.

t-
Steps for calculating /o.
t- Step 1.
r Compute the equivalent bar diameter, d", for determining the factors needed in EQ 12-1.
t
Assuming that all bars in the group are the same size,
t--
4nAJ
I
d
7l
where,
d": the equivalent bar diameter used to determine the cover and clear spacing
factors used in EQ 12-1.
I
n: the number of bars in the bundle.
l,: the cross-sectional area of an individual bar in the bundle.
Step 2
Calculate the development length of an individual bar using d6 eeual to the actual bar diameter of
an individual bar. However, the cover and clear spacing factors (parameter, c, in the "transverse
reinforcement index") are determined considering the equivalent bar diameter calculated in Step
l.
Step 3
Calculate /u by increasing / by 20o/o or 33o/o based on 3-bar bundles or 4-bar bundles,

respectively (as discussed previously).
t
I
I
l
t-
I
t_
L 200
L
CVE 482 BMS
Standard 90o and 180o Hooks A l
d
b
12d
Critical 11
Section
d
b
I
)g
lr
4door I
I
2.5" min. I
I
4do "" I
I
No.3 through No. I
I
I
5d b ----'l Nos.9,10, and 11

*" I
I
I
6d b '+, No. 14 and No" 18

I
dh
Figure 3: Tensile development and hook development criteria for 90- and 18O-degree hooks (as
prescribed in ACI318 S7.1).
When geometry does not permit the use of straight bar development, hooked bars are often used.
Figure 3 illustrates the two traditional manners in which bars are hooked. When geometry
permits, the 90-degree hook is used. However, in some cases, space may be limited in that the
geometry does not provide the space needed for the required 9O-degree hook length; this
precludes the use ofthe 9O-degree hooks. In these cases, a 180-degree hook is used.
Hooked bars resist "pullout" by the combination of bonding action along the straight length of
the bar and the anchorage provided by the hook. However, in reality, hooks do not increase the
overall anchorage of the bar because the concrete in the plane of the hook is susceptible to
splitting. Therefore, increasing the length of the hook beyond that prescribed by the ACI
provisions yields no additional anchorage strength. Additionally, due to the compressive stresses
generated in the concrete on the inside of the hook, the development needed for the hook is
directly proportional to the diameter of the bar being developed.
201
r
CVE 482 BMS
r- Hook Development Length (refer to Figure 3)
o For a 9O-degree hook: 12bar diameters.
o For a 18O-degree hook: 4 bar diameters but not less than2.5 in.
t-
Bend Radii (refer to Figure 3)
o For #3 bars through #8 bars: D = 6dt
t-
o For #9 bars through #1 1 bars: D = 8dt r*gW
t- o For #14 bars and #18 bars: D = Idt
i
Note:
1.The bend radii criteria apply to both 90- and 180-degree hooks.
t- 2. The provisions in ACI 318 for hooked bar development are not applicable for bend radii
I
larger than those listed in the above criteria (and as shown in Figure 3).
Tensile Development of the Straight Length of the Bar. /o
First, it should be noted that hooks are used to anchor only bars in tension.
0.02ry 8d
t_ du2 the larger of
'dh -
6in
f"
Where
W: the epoxy-coated bar factor (B in previous literature).
W:I.2 for epoxy-coated bars.
2: lightweight concrete factor.
),: 0.75 for lightweight concrete.
For all other cases, W:1: 1.0.
Modification Factors for /. Refer to Figures 4 and,5.

COVER: V/hen
o Hooks are made of #11 bars or smaller
. C,> 2.5in
t C 22.0in
I
I
TIES OR STIRRUPS: \/hen
t, o Hooks are made of #11 bars or smaller
o Hooks are enclosed on all sides with ties or stimrps along the entire length of /
.- o Stimrps and ties are spaced less than or equal to 3du (diam. of bar being anchored)
l@.
L
i
L 202
i
I
L
CVE 482 BMS
I8O-DEGREE HOOKS: When
o Same requirements as listed in ties and stimrps with the exception that hook need only be
confined with ties or stimrps oriented perpendicular to the bar being anchored. In this
case,
lo@.
A, PROVIDED (tension steel for bending)
o When the anchorage or the development length is not specially required for developing
the full yield strength of the bar being developed,
l@ -.A"anQ
As,PROVIDED
CRIl'ICAL
SEC'IION
cc STIRRUPS
WHEN < 2+"
,/
AND TIES
A
<2d,
- -*r,
WHEN < 2"
Section A-A
Figure 4: When the clear side cover and clear cover to the top (or bottom) of the bar being
anchored is less than 2.5-inches at the discontinuous end of a beam, stimrps and/or ties are
required to be provided as shown for the purposes of confining the hook.
Note that when considering the modification factors for /r, that when geometry becomes "tight"
the value of /r, can be considered to be the development length calculated after applying the
appropriate modification factors. Thus, the ties or stimrps needed for confinement of the bar
being developed need only be applied over the length of the modified /r.,.
203
r
cvB 482 BMS
r CRT'IC]AL
SECTION
WHEN > 2"

t- A
t-
f: il
il
|.-
11
i
11
r-
I

A
t l*,
WHEN > 2+" cs
NOTE THAT STIRRUPS MAY NOT BE REQUIRED
FOR HOOK CONF]NING PURPOSES, THEY
WILL PROBABLY BE REQUIRED FOR Section A-A
SHEAR STRENGTH
Figure 5: V/hen the clear side cover and clear cover to the top (or bottom) of the bar being
anchored is 2.5-inches or greater at the discontinuous end of a beam, stimrps andlor ties are not
required for the purposes of confining the hook.
Development of Web Reinforcement (ACI 512.13)
For No 5 bars and D31 wire and smaller stimrps (which are the common size of stimrps)
and for No. 6, No. 7, and No. 8 bars with fy of 40,000 psi or less, a standard hook has to be used
around the longitudinal reinforcement.
For No. 6, No. 7, and No. 8 stimrps with tt greater than 40,000 psi, a standard stimrp
hook around a longitudinal bar is needed plus an embedment between midheight of the member
and the outside end of the hook equal to or greater than0.0l4 dr, , (^J n)
Note No. 6, No. 7, and No. I stircups are seldom used in common members as the
required hook bend radii become too large.
I
Anchorage of spiral reinforcement is provided by 1.5 extra turns of spiral bar or wire at
t each end of a spiral unit (ACI 7.10.4.4).
Splicing of Reinforcing Bars (ACI $12.14)
Reinforcing bars are produced normally in 60ft lengths. However, during the normal
I discourse of a construction project,60ft lengths are not always practical. In cases where shorter
t- lengths are required, lap splices are used and located in areas where bending moments are less
critical.
i
L. 204
L
cvE 482 BMS
The most efficient manner of creating continuity over the length of a splice is by
providing welded butt joints (the ends of the bars being spliced are butted up against ach otherj.
However, welded splices are generally the most expensive type of splice du to the increased
labor costs associated with bringing in certified welders un th. required inspections of the
welds. Additionally, the more widely used ASTM 4615 and ASTM A617 reinforcing steel
grades are not weldable. 'When welded splices are used, the reinforcing steel must be milled
to be
weldable (ASTM A706 reinforcing steel).
The most common type of splice is the lap splice (see Figure 6). The stress transfer in a
lap splice is achieved through transfer of the stress in one of the brs to the surrounding concrete,
which in turn transfers the stress to the second bar. Lapped bars can be in contact or separated
with concrete befween the two bars. However, contact lap splices are easier to work wiih. the
bars in a contact lap splice can be tied together which helps to hold the bars in place during
concrete placement.
A bar lap splice is shown below. Note that tying of the two lapped bars over the lap
length /, does not affect the performance. The bond forces are transferred from one bar to the
surrounding concrete, which in turn transfers the bond forces to the second bar. Therefore,
concrete around the splice transfers forces from one bar to the next bar. The lapped bars could
be in contact or separated by concrete. However, for non-contact lap splices ACI 12.14.2.3
that the transverse distance between splice bars be less than the smaller of (1/5/. and 6'
r-
Figure 6: Lap splice of
L"--4
a deformed bar or wire in tension.
Another alternative for splicing reinforcing bars is the use of mechanical anchors. This
type of splice is similar to the welded butt splice in that the ends of two bars being spliced are
butted against each other. However, in lieu of welding the two ends, mechanical devicei are used
to generate the transfer of stress from one bar to the other. It should be noted that some type of
mechanical connectors can be relatively large. Thus, the size of the mechanical connector should
be considered when splices are located in areas with limited available space. Figure 7 shows
some different types of mechanical connectors.
205
f-'
CVE 482 BMS
Sleeve Coupler Interlock Coupler
Position Coupler Ouick-Wedee Lap
Speed Sleeve Standard Coupler
Transition Counler \ileldable Half-Coupler

Figure 7: Mechanical Anchors from Lenton@; u,rvrv. er i c. crnl/n rod uctsil-en Welci.asn
Lap Splices
ACI 318 $12.15 prescribes two different classes of lap splices (Class A and Class B). The
primary reasons for ACI specifying two-level splice criteria are:
1. To encourage designers to locate lap splices at points of minimum stress
206
t_.-
CVE 482 BMS
2. To encourage designers to stagger splices in order to improve the behavior of critical
sections.
Class A Lap Splice

o The lap length, /r, is greater than the larger o la or 12".
. One-half or less of the required reinforcing steel (required reinforcing steel as determined
by analysis) is spliced at a given location.
Class B Lap Splice

o The lap length, /r, is greater than the larger of 1.3/ or 12" .
o All the required reinforcing steel (required reinforcing steel as determined by analysis) is
spliced at the same location.
Note: / for calculating the required lap splice length is computed as discussed previously but
without the 12 in. minimum and without the modification factor for excess reinforcement.
Table I summarizes the criteria for establishing the class of a lap splice. In all cases of lap
splices, since the ratio of A.provided/Arrequired is taken into consideration, the "excess
reinforcement" factor used in calculating / shall be taken as 1.0.
ACI318 Table R12.15.2

Maximum percent of A. spliced within the
required lap length
I Provided
s
50 100
l" Required
Equal to or greater than2 Class A Class B
Less than 2 Class B Class B
To gain some understanding into ACI's reasoning behind establishing the provisions for splices,
the following points arc offcrcd:
a The goal of a splice is to provide a ductile situation where the reinforcing bar yields prior
to the failure of the splice.
a Lap splices fail by splitting of the concrete along the length of the splice. Confinement of
the concrete over the length of the splice reduces the probability of the concrete splitting.
Therefore, the required lap splice length is reduced.
O Code requirements are less stringent when splices are located at points where
reinforcement stresses are small relative to the yield strength of the reinforcement.
a Avoid splicing of bars at locations where maximum tensile stresses (due to bending or
axial load in the member) occur.
a Try to stagger the lap splices, i.e., do not splice all the bars within a member at one
location. ACI L2.15.4 provides specific guidelines for welded splices and mechanical
connections.
207
t-
cvE 492 BMS
t- Splices of Deformed Bars in Compression (ACI 812.161
The following are lap splice length criteria for reinforcing bars in compression.
t- 0.000s f db
",
Forf, <60ki { > the larger of t.
I dc
r2"
0.000e(4 -24)db
I Forfr> 60ksi
= /" 2 the larger of t.dc
r
I
12"
Where
/,: lap splice length
/a": development length of bar in compression
-Use the larger of the development lengths of the bars when different size
bars are being spliced.
fr: yield stress in psi
d: diameter of bar
Notes:
a) If f: <3,000psi, increase t,by 30o/o.

b) For heavily-reinforced tied columns, /, as calculated above can be multiplied by 0.83.
However, /, must be greater than or equal to 12".
c) For heavily-reinforced spirally-reinforced columns, l, as calculated above can be
multiplied by 0.75. However, /, must be greater than or equal to 12".
Special Splice Requirement for Columns

l. ACI $7.10.4.5 requires that the splice of spiral reinforcement must be greater than or
equal to 48duor 12".
t 2. ACI $ 12.17.2.I states that when the bar stresses at factored loads are compressive, use
I
compression lap splices.
t 3. ACI $ 12.17.2.2 states that when the bar stresses due to factored loads is tensile and does
not exceed 0.5fy, use Class B tension lap splices if more than one-half of the bars are
spliced at any section. Use Class A lap splices if less than one-half of the bars are spliced
t at a given section and the lap splices are staggered by /.
4. ACI $ 12.17.2.4 states that compression lap splices may be multiplied by 0.83 for tied
columns if the ties throughout the lap splice length have an effective area greater than
0.0015hs in both directions, where h : the overall thickness of the column and s : the
spacing of the stimrps (however, /, must be greater than 12"). The legs of ties
perpendicular to dimension h are used in determining the effective area. In the case of
spirally-tied columns, the lap splice length may be multiplied by 0.75 (however, /, must
f be greater than 12").
I
L 208
L
cvE 482 BMS
(1) For simple spans, continue at least 1/3 of total positive moment reinforcement into the support for at least 6 inches
(2) For continuous spans, continue at least 1/4 of total positive moment reinforcement into the support by at least 6 inches.
This assumes that closed stinups are provided.
(3) lf positive reinforcing bars are to be considered as compression reinforcement, provide compression development length in the support.
(4) lf the member is to resist moment reversals due to lateral loads, provide enough anchorage to develop the bars in tension.
Need to satisfy ACI 12.1'1.3
of discontinued
dor12dol
1-
Moment of Bars
P
Moment Strength of Bars
J-
Note: These bars cannot be
terminated unless ACI 12.10.5
ld of discontinued bars is satisfied
2lo of continued
--)- (d,12db,lnl16) for at least 1/3Asarwpport
>-d or 12 do--1
To satisfy span on rght b
209
r
cvB 482 BMS
t- ACI 12.10.5 Flexural reinforcement cannot be terminated in a tension zone unless one of the
following conditions is met:
t- (l) V, at the cut-off point<213 0 (V. + V,)
(2) A. of continuing bars (if No. 11 or smaller) 2 A, required at the cut-off point, and
r v"< 314 0 (vc + vs)
r (3) Stirups in addition to those needed for shear and torsion are provided along each
terminated bar over a distance equal to 314 d (d: effective depth) measured from the cut-
I
off point. The area of additional stimrps A' > (60 b* s)/t , where b*: web width (in.), d
r- : member effective depth (in.), fv : yield stress of stimrps (psi), and s : spacing of
I
stimrps (in.) < d/886 whero u : ratio of area of reinforcement cut off to total area of
tension reinforcement at the section.
LP.
*l J* 3i4(d)
ACI 12.11.3 At simple supports and at inflection points, positive moment reinforcement is
limited to a size such that /6 (development length to develop fr) < Vt" /Vu * /u where Mn :
nominal flexural strength assuming all the reinforcing bars at the section reach fy , V" : ultimate
t
shear demand at the section, at a support, lu: embedment length beyond the center of support,
and at an inflection point /u < d or 12d6.
If the ends of reinforcement are confined by a compressive reaction, use / < 1.3Mn Nut lu
f
t.
I
t- 2r0
L
CVE 482 BMS
STRU CTURAL INTEGRITY REINFORCEMENT
ACl7.l3.2.l In joist construction, at least one bottom bar needs to be continuous or be spliced
over the support with a Class B tension splice, and at non-continuous supports be terminated
with a standard hook or headed deformed bar.
ACI 7.13.2.2 For beams along the perimeter of the structure shall have continuous reinforcement
over the span passing through the region bounded by the longitudinal reinforcement of the
column consisting of
a) at least 1/6 of 4,,n"* (i.e., negative reinforcement at a support), but not less than two bars;
b) at least 1/4 of A.,oo, (i.e., positive reinforcement at mid-span), but not less than two bars.
At non-continuous supports, the reinforcement shall be anchored to develop at the face of

the support using a standard hook or headed diameter bar.
ACI7.13.2,3 The continuous reinforcement required in 7.I3.2.2 shall be enclosed by enclosed

by closed transverse reinforcement. The transverse reinforcement need not be extended through
the column.
ACI 7.13.2.4 Where splices are required to satisfy 7.13.2.2, the top reinforcement shall be
spliced at or near midspan and bottom reinforcement shall spliced at or near the support. Splices
shall be Class B tension splices, or mechanical or welded splices.
7.13.2.5 In other than perimeter beams, where transverse reinforcement meeting 7 .I3.2.3 is
^Cl
provided, there are not additional requirements for longitudinal integrity reinforcement. V/here
such transverse reinforcement is not provided, at least one-quarter of the positive moment
reinforcement required at midspan, but not less than two bars, shall pass thiough the region
bounded by the longitudinal reinforcement of the column an<l shall be continuous or shall be
spliced over or near the support with Class B tension splice, or mechanical or welded splices. At
non-continuous supports, the reinforcement shall be anchored to develop fy at the face of the
support using a standard hook or headed diameter bar.
2tl
t-
cvE,482 BMS
r
I Class B
S lice
t-
At Least I of
Positive
t- Reinforcement
Non-Perimeter Beams (no closed stimrps)

I
Closed Stimrps At Least f of
Throughout (except
atjoints) Reinforcement
SB Class B
Splice
At Least I of
Positive
Reinforcement
Perimeter Beams
t.
t-
I
L 212
I
I
L
CVE 482 BMS
Example 1 A box girder is to resist the applied factored loads as shown below. Assume f" :
5,000 psi and Grade 60 reinforcement. The shown distributed load includes the selweight.
Following basic structural analysis principles, the reactions and equations of moment in k-ft (in
terms of shown x and x' were established), as shown in the figure.
30 ps
4 Rtft
I I I I I
24', o
X
O+
E x-
A
+ +
375k 1125k
M@ 10" 0.c
22*
1 .5" clearto stirrups
4#8
2.5u
28u
SECTION A-A
0 <x<24' M(x) = 37.5x-2x2

Equations:
0<x'(6' M(x') = -30x'-2x'2
(a) Establish the theoretical point up to which the bottom bars need to be extended. Clearly state
the distance from the left support.
(b) Compute the theoretical point at which two bottom bars can be cut off. Clearly indicate the
location(s) on an elevation view of the beam.
(c) Establish the actual cut-off point of two bottom bars to meet the following requirements
1. Bars shall extend the larger of d or l2d6 beyond the theoretical cut-off point.
2. Actual cut-off point shall be at least l from the location of maximum moment.
2t3
r
cvB 482 BMS
r Part (a)
60
r
t'
40
I \
\
20
r cn
o.
r .Y 0
1 1 5 20 25
-20 9.375 ft.

t-
r -40
-60
t-
Distance (ft)
200
150 -1
,/ \ \
100
Max. rnoment =
t_ 50
/ 175.78 k-ft
t EO
g -so I
1 1 5 l 2 I
E -roo \ /
L 18"?$ fr.
-150
L -200
\ /
t -250 \/
-300
t Distance (ft)
L 2t4
[-.
4
CVE 482 BMS
M(x):0;37.5x-2xz:0i M:0 @*:18.75'from the left support. Up to this point, the
bottom reinforcement needs to be extended.
Part (b)
Compute the capacity of the section with2 No. 8 bars
0.85/'. ab= A"f,

2x0.79 x60
cl= = 0.797 "
0.85x5x28
c= a =-----:---=0.996"
0.797
, o'8
c o'996
d - 22-2.5 =
0.051< 0.375
.'. Tension controlled and assumption about f, = f,, is valid and Q =9.9
Mu = 0A.r, = 0 e x (2x0.7e)(6ol[rzz -2.s) 1630 k - in.
[";) "i]=
Use this capacity and moment equation to compute the distance at which two bars can
theoretically be terminated.
M(x)=37.5x -2x2 =ryt 2x2 -37.5x+ 136 = 0; x= 4.92'& 13.83'from the left support.
4 l.lo.8 Note: Barc are at the rme elevation, but

are dorn at different elevations for clarity.
13.83'
18.75',
Part (c)
Calculate the development length (l)
28- 2(l'510'5)-4(l)
clear distance between bars is =6.67" )2du=)"
Clear cover to bars :2")db:1"
I 'f,'V 'V " , L

Therefore
' =6o,ooo(1xl) )rd:
1-2oxtJsooo
42.43,,
d.
Ê
2t5
r
cvB 482 BMS
I Rule 1:
d:22 -2.5 : 19.5" dkr*tlcls

t- I2du:12"
Therefore, terminate the bars at4.92-19.5112:3.3'and 13.83+19.5112:15.46'from the left

t- support.
I Rule 2:
l from the location of maximum moment, which is at9.375' from the left support. Hence, cut
r
I
the bars at 9.375'42.43112: 5.84' and 9.375' + 42.43112 : T2.9' from the left support. These
locations are shorter than those found based on Rule 1, and do not control.
Check ACI 12.10.5

t
Vu at cut-off points
@3.3' from the left support Y":243k

@ 15.5'from the left support Y":24.5 k
z x rJsooo (2s)(22-2.s)
rt, = 2L,[J 77.2 kips
"bd 1000
Afd
0.2(2)(60)(22 - 2.s)
r/ = 46.8 kips
"1
s
V,, @ cut - off points ?J Q0/, + V ) s
K.
\ l,: kr",s
f Therefore, ACI 12.10.5 is met, and bars can be terminated in tension zone
t
The final locations of cut-off points of 2 No. 8 are as shown below.
3.3',
I 15.5'.
t.
L
I
I
L 2t6
I
L
CVE 482 BMS
Example 2 For the cross-section shown below, calculate the required straight development
length in tension for the top and bottom bars. Assume that both the top and bottom bars must be
developed for tension. The compressive strength of the concrete is 4,500 psi and Gr. 60 steel is
used for reinforcement. Assume that the size and spacing of the stimrps meets minimum
requirements. Calculate the required straight development length in tension using the
a) Simplified Expressions
b) Detailed Expression
16"
#3 Stimrps
2)-# @5"o.c.
\n
=

o\ ti
c\ \a (.)
(4 UF
Solution
Part al
Bottom Bars
For the bottom bars, ryrl.O and Vu:1:I.0. The bottom bar diameter is l.0in which is less than
the provided clear cover equal to 1.5in. Thus, the clear cover is not less than db. The clear
spacing of the bars being developed is
i..
I6in -ltUft.si,z) + (2)(0.3 7 5in) + (a)(1.0i2)l
clear spacing = 2.75in
2.75in> dt=l.jin
.'. The Defined Cases of the Simplified
Expressions can be used
For #7 bars or larger for the Defined Cases of the Simplified Expressions is
t=!''v+4=@g$gr1
" 2oL,lf; " 20 x 1{4,soo s;
lu = 44.72in
217
l''
CVE 482 BMS
l'- Altematively, one could get the development coeff,rcient from Table 2 for bottom bars and
4,500psi concrete which is 44.72. Thus 1,r44.72du. The diameter of the bottom bars is 1.0 in.
thus, the computed development length using the tabulated coefficients is
r
I = 44.7 2d t = @4.7 2)(l.Din)

I l = 44.72in
The required development length for the bottom bars, using the simplified equations is 44.72"
t-
Top Bars
t- The difference in the calculation for the top bars that is different from that of the bottom bars is
(1) the bar diameter is different, and (2) the bar location factor will be 1.3 since there is more
than 12 inches of concrete below the top bar layer.
I
Using the Simplified Expression
. f,v,v" (60,000x1.3x1.0)
(0.75) =34.88in
" 2s1,lf;
b
25xl 4,500
Alternatively, one could get the development coefficient from Table I for top bars and 4,500 psi
concrete which is 46.51. Thus /: 46.51d0. The diameter of the bottom bars is 0.75 in. Thus, the
computed development length using the tabulated coefficients is
I
a = 46.5 Id u = (46.5 I)(0.7 5in) = 34.88in.
The required development length for the top bars, using the simplified equations is 34.8".
Part bl
I
t Bottom Bars
The required development length using the Detailed Expression is
V,V,Vu
d.l)
t)['J
L
t c.*K
blr
d.l)
L Af
Wnefe /( = lrr vl
" 1500sn
L
I
l- 2t8
I
L
cvE 482 BMS
A,, = (2)(0.IIin2 ) = 0.22in2
-f,, = 6o,ooopsi
l6in- (2)(I.sin) + (2)(0.37 sn) + (2)

s- try)) =3.75in
J
n=4
(o.22x6o,ooo)
K" _ (1s00)(3.7s)(4) =0.587
lc
c" = smaller of { -"
=1.5n
{,., c.o =l.Sin
" t0.5s = (0.5x3.75tn)=l.875int
60,000 (1.0x1.0x1.0)
1.0 = 32.l4in
1x.{4,500 1.5 + 0.587
'=(*)[ 1.0
Therefore, la:32.14".
Note that the Simplified Expression results in an increased development length of 39% relative
( ++.tz- 32.141
to the Detailed Expression ( t-t (100%) =39o/o).
Top Bars
I rz.r+ )
The required development length using the Detailed Expression is
J f, V,W,V"
L=( 40 c.+K
d.t
)[ LJ r;
d.t
Af
where Kr
1500sn
219
r
cvB 482 BMS
t: A,,. = (2)(0.I ltn2 ) = 0.22in2
.f,, = 60,000Psi
t'
l6in- (2)(r .sin) + (2)(0.37 sin) + (2) (ry))
s= =II.5in
tr I
n=2
(o.22x6o,ooo)
fr K _ (1500)(11.5X2) =0.383
"
lc
t- c. = smaller of i " =t.5n :. c, =I.5in
' [0.5s = (0.5X1 I.Sin) = 5.75in D
t' (1.3X1.0X1.0)
(0.75) =26.05in
1.5 + 0.383
0.75
t. la:26.05".
Therefore,
Note that the Simplified Expression results in an increased development length of 79% relative
to the Detailed Expression ,(t#l,rooro =7svo).
t"
t
L
t
t
t 220
U
I
CVE 482 BMS
Example 3 A beam-column joint is shown in the frgure below. The #10 negative bars are to be
extended into the column and terminated with a standard 90-degree hook, maintaining a
minimum 2-inch clear cover from the far edge of the column. The specified concrete strength of
the normal weight concrete is 4,000ps1. The reinforcing steel is GR.60. From analysis, it is
known that the required area of negative steel at the face of the column is2.36in2.
a) Find the minimum length of the embedment of the hook past the face of the column (this
is the critical section).
b) Determine the minimum required length of the 90-degree hook measured from the far
side of the straight length of the bar to the end of the hook.
c) Provide a sketch illustrating the hook details.

#r0
16u
I
-t
COLUMN
l.1
U T
BEYOND
-l
(2)-#10
U) ll
'rfi
l
CLR.
#11 10"
#4
Solution
Part (a)
The development length for the straight portion of the hooked #10 bars, measured from the face
of the column to the far side of the hook, is calculated as follows.
0.02ry
lu, = "h du 2 the larger of- jlsdu
f, [.6"
Since no information is provided pertaining to an epoxy coating, V/.:1.0. The problem states that
normal weight concrete is used so, 2=1.0.
22r
r
CV.482 BMS
I Substituting all of the known values into the above equation, the hook development length is
calculated.
t- (0.02X1.0)(1.0X60, 000 psi) 8d u = $)(l .27 in) = I0.2in

1..-
dlt
(1.27 in) = 24.Tin > the larger of
1x 4,000psi 6"
t- lu, = 24'f in
"'
t- The available horizontal dimension for the development of the hook is 2|in-2in:I9in. The
required development length, 24.In, is greater than the available space and therefore, the hook
will not fit. However, the modification factors that are permitted to be applied to the
development length have not yet been considered.
Cover Modification Factor

t
Referring to the column-beam joint detail,
For side cover c, = 3in + r.5in *l 'Tin = 4.87 5in > 2.5n oK
2
The top cover is easily satisfied by observation. Note the development length of the straight
portion of the hooked bar is located inside the column where there is sufficient concrete above
and below the top bar.
Therefore, the development length of the straight portion of the hooked bar can be multiplied by
0.75.
Ties and Stimrps Modification Factor
There are no stimrps or ties around the development length of the hooked bar, therefore, this
modification factor cannot be applied.
1 80-Degree Hook Modification Factor

f
t
This modification factor does not apply to bars with 9O-degree hooks.
Excess Reinforcement Modification Factor
I It is given that the required area of negative steel at the face of the column is2.36in2. The area of
n.gutiu. steel that is provided at the face of the column is 2.54in2. Therefore, the
I
excess
i,
reinforcement modification factor is :
A'-'"q'i'"d
I
-2'36in2 = 0.93
t A s, provtaea
2.54in'
The minimum required development length of the straight portion of the hooked bar is:
lo, = (24.1,nX0.75X0.93) = I6.8in <I9in OK /ar, : 16.8" use /n : 17"
I
I
L-
I
I
L- 222
L
CVE 482 BMS
Part )
The length of the hook from the center of the bend is lLdu=Q2)(I.27in)=15.24in. The bend
radius, for a #11 bar i, !3 -(8)(I?7in) =5.0in Therefore, the total length of the hook,
22
measured from the end of the hook to the top of the bar being hooked, is. Specify l:22in.
Part (c)
A sketch showing the details of the hooked bar is shown below.
2r"
#10
17"
( mm ) (2)-#10
C-l
2"
c-l CLR.
(min)
#tt
#4
223
+,,
t-
cvB 482 BMS
t- Use of Charts for Establishine Theoretical Cut-off Points
As discussed in Chapter 4 discussing ACI moment coeff,rcients, the theoretical cut-off points can
r be established based on the concept of influence lines which are used to approximate the moment
envelope of continuous systems. The moment envelope will vary based on boundary conditions
I such as whether a particular span has a discontinuous end or not, that is to say, whether or not the
span being considered is an exterior or interior span. The following figures can be used to
determine the theoretical cut-off points, or conversely, can be used to approximate the value of
f- the moment envelope at a give location along the length of the member.
I
Four figures are provided. They are bending moment envelopes for:
t. 1. Typical Interior Span (moment coefficients left-to-right: -Iln, +1116, -1l11).
2. Exterior Span with exterior support built integrally with a column; 2 or more spans
(moment coeffi cients left-to-right: - I I | 6, + I I I 4, - 1 / 1 0).
3. Exterior Span with exterior support built integrally with a spandrel beam or girder; 2 or
more spans (moment coefficients left-to-right: -1124,+ll14, -1l10).
4. Exterior Span with discontinuous end unrestrained;2 or more spans (moment coefficients
left-to-right: 0, +1/11, -1l10).
Note: Previousl) discussed conditions (see Chapter 5.\ for the use of ACI moment coefficients
have to be met in order to use these chars.
I
I
t-
I
I
L
I
I
I
L. 224
I
L
cvB 482 BMS
1.0
4.7
0.6
146n
.1 0.1
Q"4 0.5pn
nl
o.24tn X
o.t4
o.2
0.3
t.4 0.4
o.6
4"7 fr.
0.8
0.s
.u
Bending Moment envelope for typical interior span (moment coefficients: -1111, +1116, -1t11)
n_ ,1r^^
'L0
t-
t.4825 ,,,
\- f^
0.
0.7
u.b
0.
t. 4tt,
1
. 0^
X
164/n
u.
â
0.4
0.5
0.6 nc
7
0.8
.0 0.8
ExteriorEnd .s
1.
Bending Moment envelope for exterior span with exterior support built integrally with a column; 2 or more spans
(moment coefficients: -1116. +1114. -1110\
225
r
cvE 482 BMS
r a.5244L r1
1.O
t. .9
CI.7
t' 0.
0.4
0.
t, 148tn
s.1
0.
.2 1A8h x
tr o.3
0.4
0.5
Exterior End
7 s.4
t-
0.9
.c
t
0.9
t
Bending Moment envelope for exterior span with exterior support built integrally with a spandrel beam or girder; 2
or more soans (moment coefficients: -1124. +1114. -11101
0.57
1.0
t_ o.
0.7
t_ 0.6
l-,
147 tft
CI.'l
t- 0^1fn
o.
X
t 0.?
.4
Bending Moment envelope for exterior span with
discontinuous end unstrained; 2 or more spans
U (moment coefficients: 0, +1111, -1110)
o.
l,J 226
IJ
i@
CVE 482 BMS
Example 4 The beam shown below is built of 3,000-psi concrete and Gr. 60 steel. The effective
depth is 18.625". The beam supports a total factored uniform load of 5.25 klft (including self-
weight). Locate the theoretical cutoff points for span AB based on the following requirements:
(a) Cutoff 2 No. 6 positive moment bars when they no longer are needed at each end.
(b) Cutoff two of the negative moment bars at support B when they no loner are needed.
4#6 (Top) 5#7 (Top)

Column
Transverse
Beam
A
18'i 20'-0" 21',-O" -tt_ 20'-0" -t 'l<-18"
-*l tt
2#7 plus2#6
(Bottom) 18'
6'
Effective flange width = 60"

No. 3 Grade 60 U shaped
stirrups @ 8" o.c. throughout
12"
tt
SECTION A-A
227
,tl
r
CVE 482 BMS
r (a) Calculate the moment capacity of the beam with2 No. 7 bottom bars.
I 60"
r t'
r 6rt
l- 2#7
oo
t-
t. 12"
f-l
I
l-
The capacity of this section is computed by "Flexure-ACl 2008.x1s".
fo= 3.00 (Conclele comprssive stlEnglh)
= 60.00 (Reinfgrcement yield etrength)

29000.00 (Stel modulus of lesticity)
*= 0.0030 (Maximum concrete compressive stEin) No: This value b 0.003 per ACl.
L= 12.00 (Width of web)
h= 60.00 (Width of flange)
h= 22.OO (Ovrall depth)
tr= 6.00 (Flenge lhickness)
hr= 0_00 (Dstance from top of ssction to top of hole)
hz= 0.00 (Distance from top of section to bottom of
0.00 (Width of hol)
Manaulselec{ion
Siz
t
Steel La)rer No. of Befs Bar of the secton
'l 2 7 1.20 18.625 Iln. Requlnd rir of .ulon Sbrl lf fhr S.con l. . B..m ( lJ .
2 0.(X) 0.000
3 0.00 0.000
4 0.00 0.000
t 5 0.00 0.000 gted nfo otrl a- of dlr cclionrl.ru.), i: 0.96

6 0.(x) 0.000 thb .o:mu.t ot oxcred E96 pcr A[ butlcp bcrcsnl9 396 tr opr'
7 0.00 0.000
I 0.00 0.000
I 0,00 0.000
10 0.00 0.000
L Distanc from top of section to locafion of Pn =

ls top of sec'ton in compre$on?
0.00
yes (yes or no)
Consder dsplaced concete? yes (yes or no) Nob: Typically, displaced concrete is considered.
L Mn= 1324k-in.
0: 0.9
L Mo: ll92k-in.
t Maximum positive moment:

-w
I4
1
u
2, : (Ut4)(5.25)Q0\: 150 k-ft: 1800 k-in.
t 228
U
cvE 482
BMS
5-11e2
M*o*. 1900
=0.66
tvt { 1114)*,, o.qgzs ,.
1"
.9
t
*. at
b
11 .t
t.$8
0.1 0.2
0.1
144 n
I
"\) Q.58n t.4
t.r .1
X
a.2 Q.14{n 2.4n
0.s .2
o.4
0.5 (
t.2* #
tun *" n
0.3
"4
t.
\). I
"8 u.
.9
1. fl r
Exterior End g
Therefore, the theoretical cutoff points are:
0.262l,":0.262 (20):5.24' from the right support

0.259|n:0.259 (20):5.18' from the left support
(b) Calculate the capacity of the beam with 3 No. 7 bars.
229
r
cvE 482 BMS
r 60"
r 6rt ooo
3#7
r
r
l-
12"
f- The capacity of this section is computed by "Flexure-ACl2008.xls"

tt
fo= 3.00 (Conct comprssive shangth)
t fr= 60.00 (Renforcment yeld strength)
29000.00 (Stl modulus of elaslcity)
0.0030 (Maximum concete oomprcssire strain) Note: This value is 0.003 per ACl.
bw= '12.o0 Width of web)
t b= 60.00 Width of flange)
h= 22.00 (Oreralldepth)
\= 6.00 (Flange thickness)
hr= 0.00 (Distancs ftom top of section to iop of hole)
hz= 0.00 (Distance ftom top of secton to bottom of
0.00 (Vvidth of hole)
Manaul selec{ion
Steel Layer No. ofBars Bar Size of,\ the top soc.ton
1 1.80 3.375 Idf nqill4pom onettltr" !ur;, ;,:...,'.,,
2 0.00 0.000
3 0.00 0.000
4 0.00 0.000
t
5 0.00 0.000
6 0.00 0.000
7 0.00 0.000
I 0.00 0.000
o 0.00 0.000
10 0.00 0.000
l- Distance from top of section to location of Pn =

ls top of sec{ion in compresson?
0.00
no (yes or no)
Consider displced concrcte? ),es (yes or no) Note: Typically, displaced concrete is considered.
t Mn: 182r
l.Jse the vsr"rgi) rrf th$
arlj c*r:t lw* $prl;li.
0: 0.9
L Mu: 1639
I
Maximum negative moment at support B wulzn: (1/10X5.25X20. 5'):221k-ft : 2648k-in.
10
L
M,, _1639
t M =0.62
2648
t 230
U
l*rh--
CVE 482 BMS
t- t.4825 ,,
1.t
0.
CI.
8.7
s.6
n
CI.1
CI
*.*ve {11
CI.1 \./| f
.5n 0.4 0.3

{.,r. t 0.2{n U.
x 4"24n
v. 164.{n
s.3
0.4 CI,s .*2
0.3 .4
o. n
u"/ !
u.
* I
.,t n 11 1
|{: (1t1Opl,i
Exterisr*nd
1.
Therefore, the theoretical cutoff point is
0.078 l":0.078 (20) : 1.56' from the left support
L
jse tlr* itrtutl s:rir* **g{lr
The theoretical cutoff points are summarizedinthe following sketch.
231
CVE 482 BMS
Theoretical 1.56'
cut off point
of 2#7
Theoretical
cutoff points
of2#6
5.1 I' tz
\
5.24 rl
7l
*l
18',i
I
,a
20'-0"
232
CVE 482 BMS
Example 5 For the floorplan shown below, the webs of the beams are fxed at 12 inches wide,
and the overall depth of the beams is 20 inches. The compressive strength of the concrete, for
both the slab and the beams, is 6,500psi and Grade 60 steel is used for flexural, as well as,
temperature and shrinkage steel. The floor system shown in the figure below will be a cast-in-
place system and all connecting members should be considered to be integrally-placed. In
addition to the self-weight of the structure, there is a superimposed dead load of 100psf If the
service live load is 50psf,
a) Determine the theoretical cut-off points for the negative and positive slab reinforcement.
Provide a detailed sketch showing the location of the theoretical cut-off points.
b) Determine the location of the maximum positive and negative moments for Beam A.
Provide a detailed sketch of the moment envelope showing the locations of the inflection
points and locations of maximum moment.
c) Determine the location of the maximum positive and negative moments for Beam B.
Provide a detailed sketch of the moment envelope showing the locations of the inflection
poinrs and locations of maxim"l3p.or.
l0'-0" 10'-0" 10'-0u
B 5t-0rt
I I
I I
I
1 q 10"

BE, A
+ 12'' WIDE BEAMS,
TYPICAL
I I
20"x20" COLUMNS,
\o c.l
TYPICAL
il
il
+
il
il
I il
(*'l il
il
il
Floor Plan
233
I
CVE 482 BMS
t-
l0 ?(0" *(J"- 6"
Solution
Part a)
t-
B C F F C B
t-
l'-
I
A E E A
g',-4u 9r-0il q'-4
Cross-section of slab system used for determining ACI moment coefficients.
Referring to the above figure, the following cut-off locations are established using the ACI
moment envelopes charts.
At Point A: A= 0.098/, = (0.098X112in)=fi.in

J , O\
At Point B: B = 0.108/, = (0.108X1 l2in) = I2.Iin lry:Y;_i^,.,-:U X*Ak:
-\
At Point C: C =0.2241,= (0.224)(ll2in=25.lin .n,fu. ,,#{ vdq
i,tlh tb"{
At point D: D =0.146t, = (qflr(lI2in)= ?e{he'n
At Point E: E =0.1461, = (0.146X108in=15.8in
At Point F: F = 0.2401, = (0.240X108in = 26.0in
Part b)
Beam A is in a typical interior span. The sketch shown below, which was established based on
charts discussed previously, will be used to determine the locations of the maximum moments
and the inflection points.
The clear span of beam A is(20ft)(I2inlft)-20in=220in. Using the values from the
following, the locations of the critical points can be determined. It is observed that the moment
envelope for a typical interior span is symmetric about a vertical axes at mid-span of the beam.
Zero positive moment occurs at 0.1461, = (0.146)(220in) = 32.lin

Zero negative moment occurs at 0.241, = (0.24)(220in) = 52.8in .
Maximum positive moment occurs at 0.51, = (0.5)(220in) = 119n
t- 234
t-
I
cvB 482 BMS
0.5/ 0
POSITIVE I l0', I 10"

MOMENT
ENVELOP
0.t46In 0.I46tn
32.1" 32.7"
BEAM A
NEGATIVE
52.8" MOMENT 52.8"
ENVELOP
18'-4"=220"
Representative moment envelope for Beam A
The theoreticl cut-off points for the positive and negative steel for Beam A are shown below
r
BEAM A
32.1" 32.1"
l8'-4":220"
Theoretical curoff points for Beam A reinforcement
Part c)
Beam B is in an exterior span where the exterior support is cast integrally with a column. The
sketch below, which was established based on charts discussed previously, will be used to
determine the locations of the maximum moments and the inflection points.
The clear span of beam B is (20ft)(l2in I "ft)-20in=220in. Using the values from the following
figure, the locations of the critical points can be determined.
235
r
CVE 482 BMS
I At the Exterior End
o Zero positive moment occurs at 0.I1, = (0.1X220in)=22.9r.

r- o Zero negative moment occurs at 0.1641 , = (0.164)(220in = 36.Iin
I At the Interior End
t- o Zero positive moment occurs at 0.1041, = (0.104x220in=22.9in.

i
o Zero negative moment occurs at 0.241,, = (0.24)(220in) = 52.8in .
Maximum positive moment occurs at 0'51, = (0'4s25x220in)=106'2infrom the interior end'

r- 0.4825t 0.5t751
I
106.2" I13.8"
0.1
9tt 22.0"
BEAM B
0.244h 0.164t
52.8" 36.1 "
l8'-4":220"
I
Representative moment envelope for Beam B
I
The following figure shows the theoretical cut-off points for the positive and negative steel for
Beam B. il
t It
BEAM B
I
I
t-
t
I 22.9"
I
L. l8'-4"=220"
I
Theoretical cut-off points for Beam B reinforcement
I
L 236
L
CVE 482 BMS
Example 6 The shown beam supports a factored dead load of 0.42 k/ft and a factored live load of
3.4k/ft. The cross sections at the points of maximum positive and negative moment are also shown.
Detail the beam, i.e., locate the cut-offpoints. Use f":3,000 psi and Grade 60 reinforcement.
25'{' 12'-O',
i-
2No.9
&
2No.8
!o
c\ 24"
21.5"
3@
2No.9 10" o.c
&
2No.8
L
12" 12"
1 .5" clear cover to stirrups

(D CUT.OFF POINTS FOR POSITIVE MOMENT RtrINFORCEMENT
Maximum positive moment is govemed by the following loading case.
3.82
o.42
25'-(y' I
I
46.s k 54 k
The resulting shear and moment diagrams are shown below.
237
l'-
cv,482 BMS
I 50
40 \
t-
30
t- 20
I 910
o
o
l-------
t. 6 -10
-20 -
I -30
-44
-50 \
0 10 20 30 40
Distance
"[I **u"* [*Wk"îl"tutr
300
250
200 / \ Capacity of 2 No. 9

I
J 150
o / \
E 100
II
I
t
o
50 \
24.3667ft.
f
0 -Jt-
L- -50
I
0 10 20 30 4A
L Distance (ft.)
I
I
L 238
L
CVE 482 BMS
At the midspan, there are two No. 9 and two No. 8 bars. If the two No. 8 bars are cut off,
the flexural strength of the remaining bars (2 No. 9) is
Assume bars yield

0.85f ab : A.; a: (2x60)l(0.85x1x 12):3.92"
c: alr" : 3.9210.85 : 4.614"
cldt: 4.614121.5 : 0.215 < 318
Tension-controlled, and bars yield.
:
Mn A, fv(d- alz): (2)(60)(21.5-3.9212):2344k-in
Tension-controlled; 0:0.9
M" : )JQ,!,x0.9 :21 1 0 k-in.
Hence, Mu: 176 k-ft
The theoretical flexural cut-off points of two No. 8 are where the moment is equal to 176 k-ft, i.e.,
points E and F on the moment diagram. Their locations may be computed by basic principles.
Mo:0; L76
46.s(x) - 176 - 3.82 (x)(x)12: 0; )

v
1.91 x2 -46.5x +li6:0;
46.5
x:4.68 and x :19.66

x
The bottom reinforcement is not needed beyond the inflection
point, which also can be computed based on basic principles.
IMo - 0; ttt I
46.5(x) - 3.82 (x)(x)/2 : 0;
t
o
l.9l x2 -46.5 x :0;
x:0 and x:24.36 46.5 V
The theoretical cut-off points are shown below.

x
A j
tE* *"s F
J l'rl= ffi
l- o.*' o.64'
19.66'
Now, we need to locate the cut-off points according to ACI provisions. As part of this step, the
development lengths of No. 8 and No. 9 are needed.
Use simplified method.
clear cover to bars is more than 1.5", i.e., greater than du
239
r-
CVE 482 BMS
t- clear distance between bars is I.33", which is greater than d6
I Minimum stimrp
d 21.5
10.75" Controls
22
t- 24"
r S,nu* I 4L _o.22x6o,ooo =22,,

s0b 50x12
i
Af
vr y 0.22x 60,000
t- =26.8"
I o.7sJ f \b,, o.zs.,ffi(rz)
I
The provided stimrps are at 10" on center, and meet the minimum stimrp requirements.
Therefore,
t,a 'frv 'V "
d-b 20i-J
where rrr : 1.0; V2 : 1.0 ; },: 1.0
I -t
( 60.000
'
I du:54.77 d6
'd I
Izo.ooo J
l (No. 8): 54.77 in.
l (No. 9):61.78 in.
(1) Cuoff point at F
Extend the bars (2 No. 8) beyond the theoretical cut-off point a distance equal to the
: : .
larger of d 2I.5 or I2db: T2(I) 12" Hence, the bars must be cut at 19.66' +
I
2I.51 12 : 2I.5' from support A.
i
Discontinued bars (No. 8 bars) must extend at least h:54.77 in. from the point of
I
maximum sfress, i.e., the location of maximum positive moment. For these bars, the
t. maximum bar stress occurs at 12.18' from support A. Hence, the bars must be cut at
12.18' + 54.77112 : 16.74' from support A.
I
I
t Therefore. bars need to be cut at 21r-6rt from point A.
(2) Cut-off point at E

I
t
f
I larger of d: 2I.5 or lzdb: l2(I):12". Hence, the bars must be cut at 4.68' -
L 2l.5ll2:2.89' (say 2'-l1") from support A.
L
F- -
'^f;ti^-k'.
I
L
I
cvE 482 BMS
Discontinued bars (No. 8 bars) must extend at least ld:54.77 in. from the point of
maximum stress, i.e., the location of maximum positive moment. For these bars, the
maximum bar stress occurs at 12.18'from support A. Hence, the bars must be cut at
12. 18' - 54.77 lI2 : 7 .68' from support A.
Therefore. bars need to be cut at 2'-11" from point A.
Cut-off at
Two No. 9 bars are cut at point G
For simple spans, continue at least 1/3 of total positive moment reinforcement (1/3A.
:L|3(areaof 2 No. 8 and2No. 9 bars:3.58 in.21:1.19 in.2) into the support for at
least 6 inches. Hence, 2 No. 9 must extend 25 + 6112:25.5'from point A.
Bars must extend at least l past flexural cut-off points of adjacent bars (i.e.,
theoretical cut-off point), which implies that two No. 9 must extend lo: 61.tt" from
point F. Hence, these bars must extend 19.66' + 61.78112:24.81.'from support A.
Must satist/ ACI 12.11.3, i.e., l I Mn Ay'u * lu at the inflection point. At the
inflection point (0.64' from support B), V" : 46.5 k. Mn is the nominal moment
capacity of the section with2 No. 9. i|l4.n:2344 k-in. lu < d or l2dv; hence, lu<21.5
or (12x1.128: 13.5"). lu: 13.5".
Mn A/u *lu:2344146.5 + 13.5 : 63.9" > la:61.78" O.K.
Therefore. cut 2 No.9 bars at 25'-6il from point A.
(4) Cut-off point at D
Two No. 9 bars at cut at point D.
For simple spans, continue at least 1/3 of total positive moment reinforcement (1/34
: !/3(area of 2 No. 8 and 2 No. 9 bars:3.58 in.2:1.19 in.2; into the support for at
least 6 inches. Hence,2 No. 9 must extend 6" past point A.
theoretical cut-off point), which implies that two No. 9 must extend l : 61.78" from
point E. Hence, these bars must extend 6I.78112 : 5.15' past point E into the
support. The available length is 4.68', which is not adequate. We must either make
the beam extend beyond the support (i.e., make the beam longer), provide a hook
instead of a straight anchorage to reduce 16, us smaller bars (which have shorter
embedment lengths), or do not cut the adjacent bars (2 No. 8) and extend all the bars
into the support. In this example, the last option is adopted.
Must satisfy ACI i.e., l < Mn /Vu + lu at support, where lu : embedment

12.1 1.3,
length beyond the center of support, i.e., 6". Mn : nominal moment capacity at the
241
r
cvB 482 BMS
r- support. At the support, the beam has two No. 9 and 2 No. 8 bars because we
decided not to cut two No. 8 bars.
Hence,
r Assume bars yield
0.851" ab : A.fr; a: ((2+2x0.79) x6g19.85x3x 12) :7.02"
:
c : alr : 7 .0210.85 8.26"
t cl&: 8.26121.5: 0.384
318<cldt<317 Transition zone; so bars yield
r- :
0 0.23+0. 25 I (cl d)
:
0.23+0.25 10.384 : 0.88 I
i
:
Mn : A, fv @- alz) (2+2x0.79X60X2 1.5 -7 .0212) : 3864 k-in
Mn A/u +Lu=396446.54+ 6:89.1" > l ofNo. 8 andNo. 9 O.K.
r-
I
I
Therefore. extend all the bars 6rt into the support
The actual cut-off points are summarized below. Note that No. 8 and No. 9 bars are at the same
elevation, but they are shown at different locations for clarity.
2No.9
A P
2No.8
6"1
- 21',-6" .*l ts u'
25',-0"
Note that bars cannot be terminated in tension zone unless ACI 12.10.5 is met. Two No. 8 bars cut
at2l.5 ft. from support A are terminated in tension zone. Check ACI 12.10.5:
The value of shear (%) at this point is 35.6 kips.

v,:2LJ f \.b,d = z x t.,oo 02)(21.5) = 28263 tbs = 28.3 k
V,: (Au d)/s : (0.22x60,000x21.5)/10:28380lbs:28.4 k
213 (V" + V,) : 213 (0.75)(28.3 + 28.4): 28.4 kips
I
t,
I
Vu:35.6>213(V.+V,)
I The cut-off points were computed on the basis that the continuing steel has 1.0 times the
i
t- required 4,.
I Therefore, additional stimrps (in addition to those required for shear and torsion) are needed
l
I along each terminated bar over a distance equal to 3l4d:0.75(21.5): 16.1" measured from
the cut-off point. The area of additional stimrps A'o$ >(60 b* s)/t. Hence, 0.22 >-
I
(60x12xs)/(60,000) from which s: 18.3". However, s <d/(8B6) where r: ratio of area of
i- reinforcement cut off to total area of tension reinforcement at the section : (2x0.79)l(2x
0.7 9 + 2x 1.0) : 0.44. Hence, s < 2 1.5/(8x 0.44 = 6.1" .
I
N
i
i_ Provide three extra double leg No. 3 stimrps at 6" o.c.
!
L 242
t
i
CvF,482 BMS
Altematively, two No. 8 bars can be extended far enough to avoid being in the tension zone.
Therefore, extend these bars to 24.5' from support A. As seen from the moment diagram, the
inflection point is 24.3667'from support A.
flD CUT.OFF POINTS FOR NEGATIVE MOMENT REINFORCEMENT
To get maximum negative moment, load the beam as shown below.
3.82 tdft
0.42
25',-0"
5.75 k 62.1 k
The resulting shear and moment diagrams are shown below
50
40 N
30 \
\
-Y 20 \
(E
o \
10
U)
0 \
-10
-20
0 10 20 30 40
Distance (ft.)
243
l'-
CVE 482 BMS
I 0
t-
-50
I /
-100
T
t-
J
, -1 50
o
I
l'- E
I
o
-200 Capacity of 2 No. 9
-250 I
V
-300
0 10 20 30 40
Distance (tt.)
Two No. I bars can be cut at the location(s) where the moment is below the capacity provided by
two No. 9 (ttt" : 176 k-ft). These locations can be computed based on basic principles.
- 176 :
5.8 x + 0.42 x (x/2) 0; 3.82x(x/2)-176=0;
x :18.26 andx:-45.9 x:9.6
3.82
0.42 klft
t
176 17
o
5.8 k V
I
t.
u
I
X
Therefore, the theoretical cut off points will be as shown below

r X
I
L
I
L- 244
L
cvE 482 BMS
1&26' 9.6'
l'''...*" # I
A B
The previous computed development lengths need to be revised because the negative reinforcement
would become top bars. The top bar factor is 1.3; hence,
l (No. $): J{.llxl.3 :71.2 in.

l (No. 9): Sl./$x1.3 :80.3 in.
(l) Cut-off point at J
larger of d: 21.5 of r2db: l2(r):
12. Hence, the bars must be cut at 18.26' -
2I.5lI2:16.47'(say 16.5') from support A.
:
Bars must extend at least 16 7I .2 in. from the point of maximum sfess. For these
bars, the maximum bar stress occurs at support B. Hence, the bars must be cut at25'
- 7l.2lI2: 19.06' from support A.
Bars must be anchored at support. This requirement will be satisfied when the cut-
off point K is considered.
Therefore" bars need to be cut at 16'-6rr from point A (or 8'-6rr from noint B).
(2) Cut-off point at H
theoretical cut-off point), which implies that two No. 9 must extend l: 80.3" from
point J. Hence, these bars must extend at least 18.26'- 80.3112: 11.58'from
support A.
Anchor bars at support. Since the negative moment is zero at support A, extend the
bars for 6" into the support.
Therefore. extend two No.9 hars 6rf info sunnort at A.
(3) Cut-off point at K
larger of d: 21.5 of l2db: l2(l): 12". Hence, the bars must be cut at 9.6'-
2l.5lI2: 7.8'from the end of the beam (or 4.2'from point B).
24s
cvB 482 BMS
Bars must extend at least ld: 7l.2 in. fiom the point of maximum stress. For these
bars, the maximum bar stress occurs at support B. Hence, the bars must be cut at
7I.2l12:5.93'(say 6') from point B.
Therefore. extend two No. 8 at 6'-0" from noint B.
4 Cut-off at
Bars must extend at least 16 past flexural cut-off points of adjacent bars (i.e.,
theoretical cut-off point), which implies that two No. 9 must extend l : 80.3" from
point K. The actual available length is 115" (9.6') minus 2" to 3" of cover, say
approximately 110", which is greater than the desired 80.3". Although this is
adequate, for illustration purposes use a standard 90o hook instead of a straight bar
anchorage.
0 oZv 8d
,rr=l du2 the larger of
6in
f^
0.02x1x600001
_t T.I28 = 24.71"
'or=( r x rooo ) '.ldh:24.7T"
8du = g"
> the larger of
6"
Note that when a hook is used, the required development length is reduced
significantly.
Therefore use a 90-desree standard hook for 2 No.9 bars at L
The actual cut-off points are summanzed below. Note that No. 8 and No. 9 bars are at the
same elevation, but they are shown at different locations for clarity.
l--5'
I
8'-6" 6'-0' >2 L_
Cut off points for two No. 8 bars, which are 8'-6" and 6' from support B, are in tension zone
Therefore, we need to check ACI 12.10.5 at these points.
At 8'-6" from support B, shear is 12.7 kips, which is smaller than2l3 0 (V. + V,) :28.4 kips
(see the previous calculations for positive moment). Therefore, no additional stimrps are
needed.
At 6'-0" from support B, shear is 22.9 kips, which is smaller than 213 0 (V" + V,)
28.4 :
kips (see the previous calculations for positive moment). Therefore, no additional stimrps
are needed.
246
CVE 482 BMS
Alternatively, these bars can be extended across the entire length to avoid being cut in the tension
zone
Final Details
1. If bars are extended to avoid being in tension zone in order not to check ACI 12.10.5
requirements.
2No.9
6" 1 >2. l*
I
or 24'-6"
-
No" 3 $upport
25'-0"
Sar
2No.8
2. If bars are terminated in tension zone but ACI 12.10.5 requirements are satisfied.
2 No.9
l* o" 10' 8'-6" 6'-0u >2. l*

I
or
-l 21',-6" l'- G"
N*. 3 Support
25'-0' 8ar
3@6" 2No.8
247
|'-
cvB 482 BMS

t- STANDARD CUTOFF POINTS
For beams and slabs with (a) two or more spans, (b) uniform loads, (c) difference
r- between adjacent spans not exceeding 20o/o, and (d) factored live load not greater than 3 times
factored dead load, the bar cutoff points shown below can be used. These cutoff points assume
the span-to-depth ratios are at least 10 for beams and 18 for slabs. Note that the illustrated cutoff
t- points are not applicable for beams that are part of the primary lateral-load resisting system. The
extensions of top bars need to be checked to ensure that they exceed the bar development length.
In addition, the cutoff points shown below can be used a guide for beams and one-way slabs with
t- epoxy-coated bars; however, the cutoff points need to be checked against those obtained from
r
i
more detailed ACI
of l, /3 and l, /3 Larg er l, /3 and l, /3
t4
t, l3
6" min. (Typical)

(a) Beams with stirrups
Note ACI 7 .I3 .2.5 needs to be followed if closed stimrps are not used. That is, at least I 14 of the
positive moment reinforcement required at midspan must be continuous or spliced near the
support with a class B tension splice, and at non-continuous supports must be terminated with a
standard hook.
t
I
I
I
I
L.
L 248
L
I
CVE 482 BMS
t of lJ3 and l, /3 Larger l, /3 and l. /3
I v4r 1 >As'16
>As3/6
As2 As3
As5/4
As4 As5
As4l4
l', t, t,
6" min. (Typical) (b) Perimeter Beam
La of l, /3 and lrl3 Larger of lrl3 and l./3
I r 'r4
l1 l2 l.
6" min. (Typical) (c) One-way Slab
249
I
I cv 482 BMS
Some General Remarks about Reinforcement Detailing
I Use ACI standard-bending details to avoid unnecessary costs associated with disrupting
shop routines and fabrication processes.
2 Repeat bar sizes and lengths whenever possible. Many bars can be a few inches shorter or
longer while meeting design criteria. Combining two or more sizes and lengths into one
group makes job site storage and sorting operations more eff,rcient.
a
J Use lap splices whenever possible. The cost of additional length of bar is usually less
than the cost of material and labor for mechanical splices. However, mechanical splices
are very effective in projects with a large number of heavily loaded columns particularly
if the splices result in less bar congestion. Note that the minimum spacing must be
maintained between bar laps. In large quantities, the unit cost of material and placing
labor for mechanical splices is lower, and less bar congestion reduces bar placing costs.
Use the least expensive type of mechanical connector, preferably one with the lowest
field labor installation cost. Sleeved, square-cut bars in column longitudinal
reinforcement with no tension are more advantageous to those that develop 50% or more
of the tensile strength. Avoid manual arc-welded splices of bars in the field, particularly
for smaller projects.
4 Never permit field welding of crossing reinforcement bars for assembly of reinforcement.
5 Eliminate bent bars where possible, because bending increases fabrication costs.
250
{_ [- (- (- r- i-:: -l -r - -l ::l
,'!r* '
- - - - -l - - -
i
I
t
I

Reinforced Concrete Design

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reinforced Concrete Design

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

r

f- CVE 482 - Reinforced Concrete

I Bahram M. Shahrooz) P.E.o FACI

Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Chapter2 Stresses Under Service Level Loads and Deflection

Chapter 3 Analysis and Design of Rectangular Beams. .....................38

r Chapter 4 Analysis and Design of T Beams.. ......................7 4

Chapter 5 One \il/ay Slabs......... .93

Chapter 8 Analysis and Design of Columns... 156

In contrast to steel, concrete is non-homogenous. The main components of concrete are

Steel reinforcement may be reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, or wires.

Table 1. Standard U.S. Bar Sizes

#10 4.303 1.27 1.27

Steel reinforcement has different Main Ribs

different grades. The Grade of steel refers to its

other structures. Reinforcing bars have a Bar Size # I

Welded wire reinforcement is usually shown on drawings as follows: WWR followed by

Concrete is a manufactured form of stone. A powder of Portland cement is mixed with

E,:33 *,'t $', r 9o pcf 1 ,yrc 1 16o pcf

E,: 57000 ^ff,

The dimensions of the specimen are shown below.

a=6tt 6" 6" Section A-A

nonlinear when tensile failure is imminent, as assum ed in JT

(d) Concrete Quality Control

(a) Working Stress Method

2. Creep and shrinkage cannot be easily accounted by elastic methods.

(b) Strength Design Method

Condition Load factors

Gravity and wind loads I.2DL,1.6L., l.OLL or 0.8W

Gravity and earthquakc loads 1.2DL,1.0E, 1.0LL

The maximum bending stress is

Comparing the computed stress to the allowable stress

The factored load applied to the beam is

The factored moment demand is

Tolerances and Accuracy of Calculations

Considering the uncertainties regarding behavior and characteristics of reinforced

Stresses under Service

Behavior of Reinforced concrete Members at Different Limit states

A representative load-deflection curve for a reinforced concrete beam is shown.

b) Cracked section - Steel has not yielded

c) 'oUltimate" Load - Cracked section - Steel has yielded

To simplify design calculations, the contribution of concrete beyoncl tensile strength is

Therefore, in addition to having adequate capacity, reinforced concrete members have to

a Crack width has to be acceptable.

I Transformed Section Analysis

: fr/Er. These two strains

other, we get f ,: * -f ,.. t

(a) Gross Transformed Section

The transformed section is shown on the right.

E, = 57 ,0001f = 57 , 4,000 = 3,600,000 psi = 3,600 ksi

(n-1 )4. = (8-1 X3-0.79)=1 6.59

Ig,,u,,,,,"d =l / 12(10)(25f + (25)(rc)02.5-13.2)2 +

zloxl:ss)x (23-r3.2)2 +r / t2(rf (zzsf=14,738 ina

(n-1 )R" = (8-1 X3-0.79)=l 6.59

Cracked transformed section is similar to the section used for

gross transformed section except that the concrete below the v

from which y- :7.6 in

t- Icrtronro,rn"d=l/12(10)(7.6)3 +(7.6)(10)(7.6 /2)2 +.96(23-7.6)2 =5,95gin4

For the beam shown in Example 1, calculate the cracking moment.

See Example 1 for the values of moment of inertia and..c',.

L. (a) M: + 45 k-ft; note: positive means:

f", (tensile stress in concrete) = +=ffi = 0.432 ksi = 432 psi

f, =7.sL'/ =7.5xl.,,ooo = 474 psi

f, (stress in the bars) = )r?] - tl z l = 2.87s =2,870 psi